JP6726922B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, there is known one that performs a lottery game based on a game ball winning in a winning area of a gaming area. Then, a plurality of types of winning results of the lottery game are provided, and there is a case where the advantage of the gaming state after the winning game is different depending on which win is won. Since the player expects to win the most valuable hit, it is disappointed to win the less valuable hit. Therefore, there is one in which the hits with a low value are purely enjoyed by performing the winning/missing effects in order from the hit with a high value (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-148017 A

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the game state after the winning game remains the advantage corresponding to the low-value hit after devising the win/loss effect, and the advantageous game state equivalent to the high-value hit cannot be obtained. , Was causing a decline in interest in games.

The problems to be solved by the present invention have been made in view of the above circumstances, and provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game by increasing the chances of acquiring a gaming state equivalent to a high-value hit. To do.

In one mode of a typical gaming machine of the present invention, a first lottery means for performing a lottery based on a ball entering the first starting opening,
Second lottery means for performing lottery based on entering the second start opening,
Movable lottery execution means for executing a normal lottery based on the detection of the game medium and operating the movable member when the lottery result is a predetermined result,
Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of symbols based on the lottery of the first lottery means and the second lottery means,
As a game for giving a profit to a player, a first advantageous game that is performed at different probabilities according to a game state based on the lottery of the first lottery means or the second lottery means, and at least the second lottery means. Advantageous game executing means capable of executing a second advantageous game which is performed at a certain probability regardless of the game state based on a lottery and is provided with a profit less than the first advantageous game,
In the normal game state, the first preferred game is executed by a particular drawing result derived by the first selecting means is different from a gaming state in response to execution of the first preferred game and the normal game state Specific game state transition means for shifting to a specific game state,
In the normal game state, the first lottery means derives a special lottery result to execute the first advantageous game, and when the first advantageous game is executed, the game state differs from the normal game state. Together with special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state different from the specific game state,
While the probability that the second advantageous game is executed is set to be a constant probability, the variable display that can be executed based on the lottery by the second lottery means in the normal game state is displayed for a long time, and thereby the second Lottery frequency suppressing means for suppressing the execution frequency of the advantageous game,
While the probability that the second advantageous game is executed is a constant probability, the variable display that can be executed based on the lottery of the second lottery means in the specific game state is short and shorter than the long time. A lottery frequency improving means for increasing the execution frequency of the second advantageous game by
The specific game state has a higher lottery probability that the first advantageous game will be executed than the normal game state, and the first advantage executed based on the lottery of the second lottery means. Rather than the profit given in the game, the profit given in the second advantageous game in which the variation display based on the lottery by the second lottery means is executed by the lottery frequency improving means during the short time period. It is the most advantageous lottery state for the player who is supposed to be more,
In the normal game state, based on the lottery of the first lottery means, even if a long-time variable display is performed based on the lottery of the second lottery means in order to suppress the frequency of execution of the second advantageous game. When the specific lottery result in which the first advantageous game is executed in the variable display is derived , even if the long-term variable display based on the lottery of the second lottery means is changing, the specific lottery result At the timing when is derived, the variable display for a long time based on the lottery of the second lottery means is stopped ,
Unlike the specific game state, the special game state is executed based on the lottery of the second lottery means rather than the profit given in the first advantageous game executed based on the lottery of the second lottery means. Although the profit provided in the second advantageous game is not set to be larger, the lottery probability that the first advantageous game is executed is higher than that in the normal game state, and It is characterized in that the frequency at which the movable member is operated by the movable lottery execution means is set higher than that in the normal game state and the specific game state so that the frequency of performing the lottery is increased .

Here, the "advantageous game state" is the rush mode in the embodiment. The “specific result” is a result of deriving the big hit in the embodiment. The “predetermined number of times” is the number of times saved in the first jackpot B to E in the fifth embodiment.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can solve the above-mentioned problems and can prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame was opened to the main frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 4 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure of an upper shaft support fitting of a main body frame and an upper support fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in the door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the upper decoration unit from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and saw the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the site|part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the upper right front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front after disassembling, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled as seen from the rear. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and which was seen from the front, and (B) is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view when the door frame showing the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism is seen from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the tamperproof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamperproof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamperproof member as seen from the front, and (D). FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the action of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction substantially center. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at after disassembling a main part frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall part of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, which is disassembled and seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like, which is seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 107. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 107 taken in the vertical direction. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front component member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like as viewed from the front. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 110. It is a partial cross-sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state where the game board was stored in the body frame. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from the back diagonally. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interception board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of an abnormal sound signal interruption board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when a power failure occurs of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a timer interruption processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting mouth winning process of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st special design control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st fluctuation start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st variation pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the processing during the 1st change of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving function setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st interlocking setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd fluctuation start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd variation pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd change processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd interlocking setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about an example of the ordinary control processing of this embodiment performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of gate passage processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the normal design normal processing of this embodiment. It is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of this embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart explaining the simultaneous variation control of the present embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure about an example of the sub main processing of this embodiment performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 16ms steady-state processing performed every 16ms in sub main processing. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. (A) is a simplified structural view of an attacker device, (B) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit, and (C) is an enlarged front view showing a 7-segment display. It is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the control pattern of the simultaneous change control structure of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation start processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hit game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right-handed penalty setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right-handed penalty notification process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start processing in a priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority judging processing in a priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change processing in a priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority judging processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change processing in a priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a flow chart showing a procedure of forced distraction effect addition processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, and (B) is a special symbol variation when an additional disposition notification effect is set in the forced disposition effect addition processing. It is a timing chart of effect display in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control processing in an interruption control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in the interruption control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the restart production change process in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the effect after the restart in the restart effect change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking|linkage setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking|linkage setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change processing in a reset control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in the reset control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change processing in a reset control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting processing in the reset control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. 9 is a timing chart illustrating resetting settings in the resetting control pattern of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the liquid crystal display processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the switching production processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the switching effect control of the third embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the switch production execution process of the modification of 3rd Embodiment, (B) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st switch production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the movable accessory production processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is an example of an effect transition for explaining movable accessory control of the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st fluctuation start processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st fluctuation start processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the processing during the 1st change in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation start processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation start processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hit game processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pseudo effect process in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart explaining a conventional game mode shift, and (B) and (C) are timing charts explaining a game mode shift and a pseudo effect of the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of ST frequency display processing in a 3rd embodiment. 9 is a timing chart illustrating ST display control in the liquid crystal display device of the third embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 4th Embodiment. It is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the control pattern of the simultaneous change control structure of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st fluctuation start processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st fluctuation start processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority judging processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the processing during the 1st change in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time saving function setting process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation start processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd fluctuation start processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority judging processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the round production setting processing in a 4th embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the production transition in the big hit game of 4th execution form. It is a figure explaining the characteristic game specification of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the characteristic game specification of the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a table showing the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery of the fifth embodiment. It is a table showing the hit type and distribution rate of the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment. It is a table showing the hit type and distribution rate of the second special symbol of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining production mode transition in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production mode setting processing in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production execution processing in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of production transition in a 5th embodiment.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame forming the pachinko machine seen from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board forming the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the front.

1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable so that the front side is open. A box frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and in which a game ball as a game medium is driven, a front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. On the door frame 5 of this pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the pachinko machine 1 has a horizontal direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

In this pachinko machine 1, when viewed from the front, a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 protrudes forward below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and the player can play the game.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is designed so that the player cannot touch the game ball, the obstacle nail, the various winning holes, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting the hand or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. .. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and the four connecting members 14 that connect the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 are provided, and the frame members 10, 11, 12, and 13 are connected by the connecting members 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and are substantially centered in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends, and the upper and lower parts. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided which penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The projection 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance the strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily hooked with a finger so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the external appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-like engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is the engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state where the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 while penetrating through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 in the state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the upper ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10 and a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 arranged so as to face the upper support fitting 20. Lower support metal fitting 21 and a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projection. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (FIG. 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20. In addition, the upper support fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. In addition, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front side of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-shaped protrusion protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support protrusion 21c. And a support protrusion 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of the present example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. The guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the supporting projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of a synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operating portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a to the left is increased.

As shown in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the supporting projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20e so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a has an inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the front space part of the support hook hole 20c. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a of the stopper portion 27a is inserted. A state in which the side of the leading end faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the leading end of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the axial support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, which are located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending, respectively. The centers are offset from each other in an oblique direction and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the stopper 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, the lock member 27 can be smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. Is becoming Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the shaft support pin 633 acts on the arcuate tip surface 27d due to the acting force F in the direction in which it is removed along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is A component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support projection piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the one side. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) that is disengaged from the support projection piece 20b, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Abuts the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in a direction in which it further disengages, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 is directed to the outside of the support projection piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock is performed. The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. I'm confirming.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivotal support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivotal support fitting 644 (see FIG. 67). It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 to be pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16(B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the pivot pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16(C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to fix the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily nail the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily applied to existing island equipment. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, it is possible to form the wall thickness while maintaining strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 67, etc.) adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed at the same time as the main body frame 3 can be mounted.

In addition, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is fixedly attached to the outer frame 2 and the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are fixed to each other, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right back side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the back.

As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower portion of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 which is operated.

[Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is an enlarged perspective view.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present embodiment is a door having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a substantially oval shape having a vertically long shape. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to a front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110, are provided.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can also hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower part of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (open side) ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. A handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100, a handle device relay substrate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192, and a firing cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. And a door frame base board 194 that is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192 and the like (right side of the center in the left-right direction in rear view (axial support side)) and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base. A door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the substrate 194, and a wiring 196 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. 28). Wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of the above).

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. 4140, which is provided with an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control section 4140, and the like is located on the right side (the shaft support) in the rear view of the door frame base board 194. Although the details will be described later, after being bundled together in a position of (1) side, the main side relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are held by the wiring holding member 197 and extend rearward. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular cutout 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and a ball feeding unit 580 for mounting and fixing. To the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for the game ball which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 which is obliquely inclined so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is disposed in the lower right corner portion in a front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and has a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. A lock hole 116 that is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described below can be inserted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in rear view. From the board mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and from the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side on the rear side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101, and the glass unit 590. Glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can abut, and two locking member attachments for projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 to rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190. And a section 110b.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c which projects rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with appropriate positions for the mounting boss 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and the mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) for mounting the side speaker cover 338. Are formed respectively.

Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 which is formed on the front side of the door frame base body 110 above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and is recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to perform an illegal act against the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to prevent a hole from being made from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 with a thin drill or the like. The crime prevention member 121 can prevent it and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 have an intersection point of their central axes in a front view from the center of the game area 1100 by a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1). 0.5 m) is obliquely fixed so that the sound can be delivered to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is mainly configured to output a sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, so that the door frame is closed. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment boss 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened, and the rear side rear surface has a vertical direction. Is provided with a step 195a which is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section as shown in FIGS. , Is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the present example, three in the upper and lower direction) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 is vertically aligned with the step 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be housed in the step portion 195a.

The wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined binding band in the upper and lower holding holes 197a with wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof. The wire 196 can be held by inserting the wire 198 and tightening the wire 196 together with the wire holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. As a result, it is pushed forward and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side ends. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that the wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in the direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring 196.

As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base board cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is rotatably supported on the rear surface and part of the wiring 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring 196 can be laterally folded or unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened or closed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.).

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force is applied through the wiring 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the wiring from being shaken in the direction, and it is possible to surely fold the wiring 196 in the lateral direction to prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. When the wiring 196 hangs down, it is caught by another member and is disconnected. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed. The wiring 196 connecting the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, and the like as electrical devices is defective. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the noise as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, so that the wiring holding member 197 can rotate even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Since the force can be released by the wire, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as the wiring 196 being pulled and broken or the connection connector coming off. it can. A part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates. The wiring 196 does not slide like the above), and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197 arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from dropping from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position apart from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring 196 to move the wiring 196. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by being guided (guided), the main body frame 3 having enhanced strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. The door frame 5 can be used as the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention property against fraud.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring holding member 197 is wired by the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround three sides of 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wire holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the body frame 3 in the wire 196 extends. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. A pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axis center of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, so wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is performed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and an unnecessary force is exerted on the wiring 196, etc. to cause a problem such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back along the wiring holding member 197 at the tip end side. Therefore, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted when the door frame 5 is closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a defect from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size and having the large game board 4 to attract the player's attention strongly. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the right-angled direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions projecting into the tubular portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when mounted on the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined, so that the axis of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined in a similar manner.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes, as mainly shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 slidably provided on the upper surface in the upper and lower end portions of the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155, 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the main body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent protrusion 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 which is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and is vertically extended. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projection piece 159, the upper bent projection piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the rear surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a cutout portion 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base body 110.

In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. As shown in the drawing, the open-side inner bending protrusion 164 is formed so that the open-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the open-side outer bending protrusion 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, is provided on the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 112). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long sides thereof.

The shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is adapted to be mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. In addition, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the C-shape (FIG. (See 112), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, and it is possible to prevent only the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent illegal tools from entering the game board 4. As shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and has an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 on the upper side thereof. The contact recess 181 is formed, and the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shape thereof are respectively provided. In addition, the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (the pivotal support side) in the rear view is formed to extend rearward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front projection 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and on the outside of the crime prevention front projection 184, A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to be fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the crime-preventing protruding piece 182 is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4, and the half on the open side is in the front. The component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. Thereby, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention post-piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. ..

The security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the ball guide path formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface of the security cover 180 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of a ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses through the guide passage portion.

Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, and thus the fraudulent act. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly safe against such problems.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locks the locking projection piece 451f of the glass unit 590. This glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a rearward projecting ridge that rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating.

The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit which is disassembled and seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembling it.

As illustrated, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed along with the arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 forming an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and having a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210. A right side upper decorative substrate 214 having a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a side inner on the lower side. Rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and lower right side decorative substrate 216, which are arranged below the substantially vertical center of the lens 212 and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. A right side upper decoration substrate cover 218 that is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and a right side lower decoration substrate 216 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216. The lens 210 and the right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the side outer cover 202.

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the front side of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is omitted. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are the side inner lenses. An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

In this right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. The decoration boards 214, 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b are made to emit light as appropriate, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and the left end thereof is the game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 includes a circumferential lens portion 210a formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210a divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens portion 210b formed of a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centering on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

In addition, the side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the up-down direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c can diffuse light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 to the right and up and down of the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses in a mountain portion protruding forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light with a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to make the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 glitter. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

The right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A narrow angle (for example, 15° to 60°) is used. The LEDs 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper portion of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn portion of the side upper inner lens 206, and is used as noise for other pachinko machines. It's hard to come by. Like the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-shaped front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in the wrinkle-shaped portion protruding forward. Therefore, light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is adapted to be inserted and arranged in front of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each.

[Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit which is disassembled and seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a photograph of a light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit.

As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrical to the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and having a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and between the large window frames 242a. Frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row, and a large The frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side flash lens 246, which is fitted from the rear side into the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246. In the side lens 250, a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a supported from the rear side and fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 from the rear side. A rear side of the inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens section 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the inner decoration member 251. And a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

The left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the substantially center of the side inner lens 252 in the up-down direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A left side upper decoration board cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration board 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration board 256. The left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 is attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion in front view, and a transparent speaker attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252 for supporting the upper left speaker 262. A diffusion portion formed by the upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264, inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view, and extending radially around the lower left and right center. And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In the left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 is made of a translucent and milky white synthetic resin as a whole. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) are used. Opening frames 242c, 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b in a state where the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are cut out to the side surfaces, and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, respectively. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and then to the rear of the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left-side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left-side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

Further, the front surfaces of the left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decorative unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, the decoration boards 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting.

The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is configured to extend in the up-down direction along the left outer periphery of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and on the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Has been formed.

The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other.

Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in a front view which is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left side outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101, It is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The side decorative frame 244 is arranged between the large window frames 244a and two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially oval small window frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. ing.

The side decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the side decoration frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other. The upper side decoration frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size in which the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are combined, and has a size extending from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a concave shape rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens section 250b on which the side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the emission lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decoration member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and also in the width direction thereof so as to be concentric with the center of the game window 101 as the center. There are multiple. Further, the inner decoration member 251 has a front surface formed with a plurality of slits 251a formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

The side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted into each inner decoration member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of belt-shaped lenses radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 in the left-right direction on the front surface, and the inner direction in which the belt-shaped lenses extend is arranged on the front side. The decorative member 251 is configured to intersect (substantially orthogonal) with the extending direction of the slit 251a.

The side inner lens 252 is configured such that the diffusing portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but light is diffused and refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

Further, the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are mounted with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs on their surfaces, and the large size of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is large. LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60° to 180°) and are used. LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (the radiating lens section 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, similarly to the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the center of the pachinko machine 1 on the left and right when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side in a front view. It has become. In addition, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous and breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is less likely to make noise than other pachinko machines.

Next, the characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side lens 250 including the curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a forming the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and the surface of the side lens 250 disposed behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a plated layer of metallic luster, and arranged in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a. A left inner decoration substrate 254 and a left inner decoration substrate 256 on which a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a arranged behind the side inner lens 252 are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

By the way, the light emitted forward (on the side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decoration member 251 side on the inner surface of the peripheral lens part 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected to the peripheral lens part 250a side (on the front side), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens part 250a and is radiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, since the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and the peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surfaces of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the respective shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersects with the extending direction of the slit 251a by a diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades, extending in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting with the extending direction of the slit 251a. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

The upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper portion of the central frame 281a to a left and right direction and narrows toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c that extends from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes narrower toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion that are arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 that is inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulges forward, and a plate-shaped diffusing lens 285 that is disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 and has a plurality of fine prisms formed on its surface. An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a tube disposed on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged on the rear side of the light shielding member 287 and corresponding to the inner side of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outer side of the cylindrical portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged on the front surface of the upper central decoration substrate 288.

In addition, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289. LED 290a mounted on the upper side decoration board 290, a board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decoration board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 that is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 has a large amount of light-transmitting property and a predetermined size. And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped in a shape.

Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decoration member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape are provided. ..

In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 is shimmered by light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of radially extending strip-shaped lenses arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the center of the axial center of the through hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, light can be diffused and refracted by the plurality of prisms and belt-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed in a spindle shape with a smooth front surface, while a plurality of concentric lenses is formed on the rear surface, and light can be irregularly refracted, so that the rear surface is clear. Is not visible to.

Further, the upper central decoration board 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, the upper side decoration board 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decoration substrate 290 can appropriately light the LEDs 290a to lighten and decorate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281.

[Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later, and a game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. When the upper plate main body 312 is covered with the plate-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed to the center of the front surface and which is open at the upper and rear sides and bulges to the front on the left side (axial support side), the front end is the front. When viewed, the upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 arranged between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and a right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 are continuous with and cover the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is provided.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to a plate-shaped board mounting base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left-right center to the right lower surface, and to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And a top plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately emitting the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the dish unit 300, the lower side of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 to open the upper and rear sides, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the front view, and the front end extends to the center in the left-right direction. The dish-shaped lower tray body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and the center in the left-right direction fixed to the upper portion of the lower tray body 324 is bulged forward in the same manner as the lower tray body 324 and the front end is in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right when viewed from the front. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and a right side of the lower plate cover 328 at the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 are decorated on the right side with the upper opening 330a and the upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a. And a lower dish side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that is opened to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

In addition, the plate unit 300 includes an obliquely extending lower plate upper left side cover 332 that covers the left side front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left side front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is disposed at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. A lower plate left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 formed of a metal plate which is configured to close the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 from the rear side, and which allows sound to be transmitted. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are designed. And a side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. And a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in the shape of a disc that is loosely curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

In addition, in this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even when pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate body 312 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and the lower plate body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and attached to the lower surface and the plate unit base 310 are installed on the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 that can store game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape and an upper dish ball supply port 310c penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an upper dish ball supply. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d which extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction below the mouth 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) and below the vicinity of the right end of the decorative portion 310a, and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper dish ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. In addition, the upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e, and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It has a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball can pass.

The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 at the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540, Since it becomes impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the paid out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls there. The direction is changed, the guide recess 310j is guided to roll to the right in the front view, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower tiers in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself or herself to a game ball driving operation or a game using the game ball that has been driven, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

The upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k which is widened to the left in a front view. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging from occurring in the lower plate ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games can be played. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. As for the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed near the intermediate position in the vertical direction so as to be located respectively, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, this upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) and can remove the static electricity charged in the game ball.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction. There is.

The upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape that extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314 in a curved shape. The upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position on the right side in the center in the left-right direction, whereas the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and is capable of irregularly refracting light. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decoration member 318 is arranged on the rear side of the left side smoothly formed portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316, and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is not fixed.

The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 has a surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved in a spindle shape like the right side portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316. It is formed integrally with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of an upper dish ball removing button 341 of an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) thereof, which makes it possible to irregularly refract light and prevents the player from clearly seeing the lower side. There is. In addition, the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The bottom plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan-like shape extending forward in a plan view, the rear end thereof being linearly formed in the left-right direction, and the center of the top surface thereof being the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are mounted and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed in the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening/closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a silver-colored plating layer on its surface (not a mirror surface but a matte state like sandblasted). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-shaped portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower tray cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower tray side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed through the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the lower plate upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. Further, the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface thereof, and extends from the lower end to the rear to extend to one side of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. It has a plate-shaped portion that forms a part. The opening portion 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the lower speaker 821 (speaker for bass) provided in the main body frame 3 described later, and the sound from the lower speaker 821 is played by the player. It can be transmitted to the side. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein. ..

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334 close the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover. The bottom surface between the base plate 334 and 334 is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 described later.

The upper bowl ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removal button 341 which is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be able to move up and down, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341. And the operation plate 342 which moves up and down by a larger amount than the up and down movement of the upper plate ball removing button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and which supports the operation plate 342 so as to be operable (rotatable) and the plate unit base 310. Of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 that slides in the vertical direction and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and an upper plate ball attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310 slidably supporting the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the vertical direction. And a removal base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

The upper bowl ball removing base 344 of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl ball discharging port 310d of the dish unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper bowl ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and a ball guide flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a and then guides it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 42). 44), and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. The ball removing passage 344c in which the game ball can be rolled is provided.

In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

Further, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110, with the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. At the same time, the lower end extending to the pivotal support side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is loaded. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and also the contact piece 343a protruding rearward. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball removal port 581b to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Note that the ball punching member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper plate ball punching slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition part 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like are provided. It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is disposed below the lower plate main body 324 between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334, and forms a bottom central portion of the plate unit 300. The ball removing base 351 and a plate-like opening/closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and capable of opening/closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 are rotated. A lower dish ball removing slide 353 that is supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removing base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removing button 354 that is attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removing slide 353. ing.

This lower dish ball removal base 351 is provided with a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating vertically in a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which penetrates in the vertical direction. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing base 351 so that the closing portion 352a closes the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a. ..

Although not shown in detail, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes an abutment pin capable of abutting the lower dish ball removing slide 353, and the abutment pin abuts the lower dish ball removing slide 353. The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slide 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slide 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

In addition, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening/closing shutter 352 is substantially the same as the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball pulling slide 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold it in the moving position.

This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. There is a state in which the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening/closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removing button 354 in the closed state is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball removing button 354 and the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides backward. The opening/closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 356.

Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removal hole 324b. It should be noted that when the lower dish ball removing slide 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 holds the slide by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower bowl ball removing slide 353 is locked (held), the lower bowl ball removing button 354 is moved backward and remains in the open state, and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removing button 354 is held in a state of being matched with the hole 3324b.

On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower plate is removed. The opening/closing shutter 352 is configured such that the ball-sliding slide 353 can slide and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 moves down. It is possible to return to the closed position that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like, and store the game balls in the lower plate 302.

It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit 300. It is possible to lend (pay out) into the upper plate 301 of the dish, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan There is. Further, the remaining balance display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a transparent ball rental unit front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan remaining display portion 363 and a loan remaining display portion 363 that is arranged behind the ball rental unit front cover 365. A ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch that is operated by operating the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and the ball rental unit of the dish unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and a rental button formed between the button openings 310m. It is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the ball unit front cover 365, and projections 310o formed on the outer circumferences of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward, respectively, and are transparent to close the display opening 310n. The lending remaining display portion 363 arranged on the rear side through the ball rental unit front cover 365 is visible from the player side. Further, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end as shown in FIG.

As shown in the drawing, the ball rental unit 360 of this example has a ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362.

In addition, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (on the player side) from the outer circumferences of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his/her hand into the upper tray 301. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent the 361, the return button 362, and the like from being erroneously operated.

The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even a new pachinko machine 1 (a new model of pachinko machine) can reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. Is becoming

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted or the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball into the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. A base member having a spring 418 biased upward, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 that has an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass through, and a base member 420 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420. Mainly includes a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surfaces of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating which is arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and has a predetermined shape and which has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with layers and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. , A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the dial decoration board 430 having a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at a position corresponding to the ring and a lower side of the operation portion holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation portion 401. 432b, a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and an outer side from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a. A flange portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c is mainly provided. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation portion 401 includes a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, so that the dial operation portion 401 is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Furthermore, the dial operation portion 401 further includes a protrusion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, which will be described in detail later, and the step 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the drawing, the contacting surfaces of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operating portion 405 are lowered toward the center of the dial operating portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to increase the contact area when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation section 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation section 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation section 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation section 405 side. It has become.

The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 that is arranged inside 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is applied to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower outer periphery and having a lower end protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (depressing operation portion 405) does not rotate inside the button support cylinder 416b. It should be noted that a gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the abutting portion inside the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the center in the up-down direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a between the upper and lower sides. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Accordingly, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular sliding surface on the lower surface that abuts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being locked with the connection locking part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details of the rotation detection pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward and reverse directions in small steps by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time for each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to add a feeling.

Further, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f (locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406). 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c for transmitting light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416e through which the pressure detection sensor 432c that is attached to the button decoration board 432 is seen from the upper side, and a pair of board holding claws 416g that extend downward from the lower surface and hold the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks it. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy so that the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b that is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation unit holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically extends through the operation unit holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape that allows the gear rail 416a to pass therethrough, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and that is recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410, Equipped with. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e are provided.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper concave portion 420c, and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g, which are different from each other outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recess portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass through the central opening 420a. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b from above. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can be slidably rotated in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by mounting the dial drive motor 414 on the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 and the like from being defective due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box-like shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a of an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on its top plate. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

The upper cover 422 extends downward from one outer periphery (front side in the pachinko machine 1) of the minor axis direction (front-back direction in the pachinko machine 1) and has a lower end protruding outwardly, which is a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. Equipped with. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off from the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation portion 401, and the like are attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below. By covering the upper portion of the base member 420 so as to pass therethrough, it is possible to prevent the dial operation portion 401 from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape that substantially matches the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and the leg portion of the base member 420 is located at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the bottom portion. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (the left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown in the drawing, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that vertically penetrates through the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a to mount the operation unit of the tray unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when the is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be alleviated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then, The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. The pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 have a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. Thereby, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection/non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described later in detail. .. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation part 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protruding part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is inevitably hit and the operation unit The force of striking 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the concentration of hit impact can be suppressed to prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Since it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, it is possible for the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the impact and the load can be received by the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, so that the impacts and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like. The operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can improve impact resistance and load resistance.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position where the operation portions 401 and 405 are supported, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is abutted against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c and impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The portion supporting the member is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operation portion 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moved downward, the dial operation portion 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 in accordance with the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405 can be paid attention to, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and prevent it from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 supports the dial operating portion 401 through the opening 420a, the dial operating portion 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (operating portion holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operating portion 401 can abut the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operating portion 401 can be moved to the base member. It can be surely prevented from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation motor 414 is often used to rotationally drive the dial operation unit 401, or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, so that it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being defective due to overheating, and to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being damaged. It becomes possible to endure a high load, and the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive motor 414 as described above can be sufficiently embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. can do.

Further, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more convenient for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with which the player can experience, and it is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Further, since the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation sections 401 and 405 are provided, the operation sections 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated, and therefore the operation sections 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 contact each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation portion 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 vibrates the dial operation portion 401 by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, so that the dial operation portion 401 is vibrated by virtue of the step portion 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation unit 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, and entertaining the effect using the operation unit 400. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be achieved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being deteriorated due to the interruption of the game.

In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range around the axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, a dial drive is performed. Even if the dial operating unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operating unit 405 from attempting to rotate together with the dial operating unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial operating unit 400 in the dial operation. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to easily entertain the player using the operation unit 400 and guide the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405. The characters “PUSH” displayed can be easily read by the player without turning or greatly tilting, and the player can be sure to recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is to be pressed. be able to.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner tubular portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined vertical position. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. In addition, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and at the same time, the inside of the operation unit 400 can be provided via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and prevent the occurrence of a problem that the dial operation section 401 becomes difficult to rotate and the pressing operation section 405 becomes difficult to press due to the entry of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, a portion of the dial operation portion 401 in the circumferential direction is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position deviated from the center of the pressing operation unit 405 to the outer periphery), the dial operation unit 401 is surely contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the load resistance with respect to the pressing operation portion 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to decrease toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where the contact portion is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The loadability and impact resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward/reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but also the dial operation portion 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, forward/reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the plate unit 300 has a high strength and rigidity in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently deal with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation portion 405), and it is possible to easily entertain the effect using the operation unit 400.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 51(B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and seen from the rear. As shown in the drawing, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape, a handle main body 504 that is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, A front end cover 506 that is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle body 504.

In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with 504 and that has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery; a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510; The rotational position detection sensor 512 is provided between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view through the transmission gear 511. The biasing auxiliary spring 514, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 are attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the firing stop switch 518 and the inner base 508. A one-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported and operates the firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504. And a handle return spring 522 for urging the handle return spring 522 so as to return it to a rotation end in the direction of.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion which is open at the front side and bulges rearward and has a rear end portion which extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with an arcuate slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking protrusion 504b protruding rearward, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. By being locked, one end of the handle body 504 is biased by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so as to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip portion inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the turning operation can be performed easily without any discomfort.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launch strength according to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle main body 504 is rotated so that the firing strength is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 reaches the right side area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side area. Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing strength becomes smaller than a predetermined value, the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 flows down in the left area on the left side of the center role object 2500. In this way, it is possible to separately hit the game ball into the right side area and the left side area by the operation of the player. The ball speed of the game ball flowing down the right side area on the right side of the center character 2500 is relatively higher than the ball speed of the game ball flowing down the left side area on the left side of the center character 2500. Then, a game ball flowing down in the right side region at a relatively high ball speed can win a prize in a second starting opening 2102 described later, and a game ball flowing down in the left side region at a relatively low ball speed will be described later. It is possible to win a prize in the first starting port 2101.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 506 are plated with a conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle main body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

When the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive can be stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, before operating the one-shot button 520. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, after the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frame 5 is linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest due to a defect in the game ball being hit.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 (shooting solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), 100 game balls are sequentially launched at a constant interval per minute. It is designed to be driven at the launch speed (pace). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), game balls are successively driven into the game area 1100 at 0.6 second intervals.

[Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52(A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of flow paths for gaming balls inside, and a front cover 544 closing a front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball inlet 542a which is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A first ball passage 542b that spreads to the right in front view as it goes to the front end of the cover base 542, and a second ball entrance that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. 542c, and a second ball passage 542d which communicates with the second ball inlet 542c and extends downward and is inclined downward toward the lower right corner in a front view inside the cover base 542. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged in a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and is open upward, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e and guide the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 to rotate the opening/closing crank 793. The open/close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged at the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is adapted to be connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 of this example uses the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. It is possible to supply to the upper plate 301 from 544a via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. 544b can supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received in the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

In addition, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and the cover base 542 is swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. Of the swing member 548 pivotally supported by the full swing sensor, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in the non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. And 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swing member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542 and an upper end rotatable leftward in a front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is provided with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , Are provided so that static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball can be removed.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even when the upper plate 301 is full, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also filled, the game balls start rolling to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770. From the full tank outlet 776 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b.

When the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) stops the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. It is designed to give a notification to the person to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. It is not detected, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Antistatic measures for door frame base board 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (molded product of transparent polycarbonate) (see FIGS. 52(A), (B) and FIG. 53) has the second ball passage 542d and the game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. Since the accommodation space 546 that retains the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, static electricity is generated by rubbing the game ball and the resin, and the game ball is charged. Cheap.

Therefore, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal ground rail 554 is provided for removing static electricity of the game ball generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball and discharging it to the lower plate. There is. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-shaped grounding metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the grounding metal fitting 556 at the left end can be electrically conductive to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53). The earth metal fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIG. 18, FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

The second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game sphere by the ground rail 554 as described above, but electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, which may reach 10 kV or more. There is (at most 3 to 4 kV even when pain is felt due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, even if the electric charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, it escapes only in the very periphery and most of it remains. Then, the electrostatic induction by the electric charges may cause a malfunction of the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 near the electrostatic induction.

A ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to the gaming machine, for example, on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. However, there is a risk that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

The embodiment described below is made in view of such a situation, and electrostatic charge induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 even if the earth is not taken. Related to the invention relating to the static electricity prevention mechanism for shielding the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and preventing static electricity escaping to the shielding metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. Is.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism as viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of the main part of the door frame showing a state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. Further, FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (tin plate in this example) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. -Shaped shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than that of the shield plate 562 and insulates electric charges that have jumped to the shield plate 562 so as not to jump to surrounding conductors. The insulating sheet 570 is included.

The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-shaped conductive portion 563 that is in conductive contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5 at the upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 that is bent and formed in the horizontal direction. At a position below and behind the conductive portion 563, the substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 is arranged over substantially the entire rear surface side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame 5. And have.

A mounting portion 565 that extends in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565, and a mounting hole 567 is formed in the left corner near the upper side of the conductive portion 563. Has been drilled.

The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and serves to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from surrounding conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the shield plate 562 near the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 by adhesion.

55 to 57, as described above, the door frame base substrate 194 has the rear side covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 is arranged over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is arranged on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 such that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 comes into conductive contact by contacting the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5 to release static electricity.

Note that mounting bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for the foul cover unit 540 are provided at appropriate positions on the right side portion of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). Further, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the grounding metal fitting 556 to the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 made of metal so as to release static electricity to the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 at appropriate places. 154c are provided (see FIG. 56).

The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110g into the insertion hole 566, and the screw is inserted into the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame. It is screwed to the base body 110.

Then, the foul cover unit 540 is arranged with the front cover 544 in surface contact with the back surface of the shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted into the mounting portion thereof, and the screw is screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110. Further, the grounding metal fitting 556 has a screw inserted into its mounting portion, and further, the screw is inserted into the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The door frame base body 110 is screwed so as to escape.

In addition, the shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached to the attachment boss 110g together with screws. In addition, a ground wire (not shown) is attached together with a grounding metal 556 with a screw to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154.

[Operation of Antistatic Mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 which is in surface contact and the conductive portion 563 which is in surface contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540.

In addition, since the shield plate 562 is arranged so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge that has jumped to the shield plate 562 is transferred from the corners or end faces of the shield portion 564 to the surrounding conductor (metal). (Objects and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. 58A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. Further, FIG. 60(A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 60(B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 61(A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the action of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be supplied. It is possible to pull out to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340.

In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having an opening 581a penetrating therethrough and a ball outlet 581b opening to the lower side of the entrance 581a, the rear end of which is closed, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a batting ball supply port 582a for supplying a gaming ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the batting ball launching device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover. A ball removing member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581; , Sending the game balls on the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 one by one to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover and rotatably supporting the shaft extending vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. And a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b below the inlet 581a, and the upper surface of the partition 583a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, and bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotatable rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction, facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition 583a of the ball-removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90° about the axis of rotation. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod section 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the ball hitting supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball hitting launcher 650, and at the same time, the game entered from the entrance 581a onto the partition 583a. The movement of the ball to the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 584a and remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved back and forth by the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 586 whose tip is vertically swung by the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 which is vertically swung. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the vertical direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 which is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 that moves up and down. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

In addition, the sphere member 583 rotatably supported in the sphere feed unit 580 of the present example is adapted to receive a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 583d. The rotation of the operating rod 583c protruding forward is regulated by abutting the upper end of the abutting piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300. At normal times, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-removing member 583 partitions the space between the entrance 581a and the ball-removing opening 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball-removing opening 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and abuts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and enters through the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b into the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 583a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is It is possible to prevent the partition part 583a from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60(B) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape having a laterally long overall outer diameter in a rear view, and is located on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip that is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of the boundary, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 (backward) so as to move away from each other. It is provided with a V-shaped cut portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

As shown in the drawing, the fraud prevention member 588 is bent at the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (the left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b is moved backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is formed. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted inside the V shape. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. Is formed.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d. It is like this. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is provided. The portion corresponding to the portion where the mark is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time, is formed so as to communicate with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw attached is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is played by the ball striking device 650 in the game area of the game board 4. When struck into the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the batted ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in a front view, between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempt to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the illegal moving path of the game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 to the side of the ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 is such that the game ball I moves to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). In order to move along the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a when viewed from the rear, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed at the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided to the inside of 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the improper momentum of the game ball I.

Thereby, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) at the cutting portion 588d of the illegality preventing member 588 by the momentum of the illegal game ball I. Then, the cutting portion 588d acts on the wire Iw by friction or shearing force (see FIG. 61D). At this time, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is dampened by the momentum due to the friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, so that it does not enter the game area 1100 and is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, an illegal act is performed in the game area 1100 with the illegal game ball I attached with the wire rod Iw. It is possible to prevent people from being exposed. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588 as described above, so that the illegal act cannot be performed. Even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to damp the force of the illegal game ball I and the gaming area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player installs the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven to send the game ball to the hit ball launching device 650, and the ball hitting device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, whereby the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is opened. The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game, and it is possible to entertain the player, and at the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585) is provided. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball-stripping member 583) are provided, so that not only the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-stripping member 583 but also the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-striking device 650 are possible. When the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the number of game balls remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, and to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game balls in an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and suppress a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game is relatively performed. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball removing member 583, compared with a case where the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 are separately provided, only by attaching the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding member 580 is attached. Since the 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, so that the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583 have a problem. However, even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be easily solved.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper dish ball It is not necessary to configure a transmission mechanism (upper dish ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable/closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism will be consumed quickly and malfunction or be damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, or the like. And durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game balls can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game balls from, and it is possible for the player to easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

Further, the partition plate 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the partition 583a as much as possible, and the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding mechanism are provided. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be provided.

Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is biased upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 connects the admission port 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts on the partition part 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition part 583a (ball removing member 583) durability can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, it is possible to prevent the game ball from hitting the partition 583a even if the game ball hits the partition 583a, and the game ball is repelled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in the planar projection can be reduced. It is possible to achieve the effect of.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, when the partition portion 583a or the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 fails, the partition portion 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance and discharge ports are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (insertion device) side even though the discharge operation section is not operated. Since it is not discharged to the player side, it is possible to let the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble, and to move to the pachinko machine 1 with no trouble, which is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the bent rotating rod portion 583b, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is bent. The impact is prevented from being linearly transmitted to the rotary shaft by dispersing the rotary shaft 583b by the 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotary rod portion 583b. Can be increased.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game ball in the upper plate 301, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are discharged. It is possible to minimize the movement in the direction, improve the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball launching device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. With respect to the wire rod Iw being pulled fast (strongly), the wire rod Iw can be surely cut, and the illegal momentum of the game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front side, in order to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward may not be projected rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece portion 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 may injure an operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, in the illegality preventing member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent rearward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is substantially the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stopper pieces 592a which are arranged on the upper portions of the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement portion which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. And a stop 592b.

In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to be engaged with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Modeling decoration on door frame]
Next, a molding decoration on the door frame 5, that is, a shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame by cutting it at substantially the center in the vertical direction. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls lined up and down below the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 which closes the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. Further, the door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

The door frame 5 has greatly different appearances on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has an appearance like a natural rock rugged by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, which are visible from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240 on the left side, have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the door frame 5 differs in the amount of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It projects more than 240 forward. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved planar shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, when viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to be similar to each other (see FIG. 19), while the left front When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like this. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to give the illusion of a pachinko machine of a different model. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing to the player and can attract the player's attention.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall or the like, the overall appearance of the island facility feels solid and solid. By arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different configurations alternately, it is possible to give a rhythmic impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be increased and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in each of the units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. It is designed to be able to emit light with any color so as to surround it. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 are included. , 254b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[Light emitting decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by making each LED emit light as appropriate, the game window 101 The outer periphery of the can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is included. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by a single smooth curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

In addition, the door frame 5 is behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. It is provided with LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is used as an LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210, 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that face the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 and an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the extended frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted. It is possible to separately decorate the and. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be decorated to emit light. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decoration substrate 288 and the upper side decoration substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and has an appearance continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this plate unit 300, an upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322 allow the upper plate front decorative member 316 to operate. The right side portion and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 that decorates the front plate outer circumference of the upper plate ball removing button 341 can be illuminated and decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmitting columnar pressing operation portion disposed inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration board 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effect as the above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to each other. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 near the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 63 and 64) and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64) and by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, a substantially concentric shape is formed so as to surround the game window 101. A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be provided. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the hatched area close to the game window 101 is annularly illuminated, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , A radial group 104 (in FIGS. 63 and 64) that extends radially around the lower left-right center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. A variety of information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is defined as an upper center group 106 for illuminating and decorating the upper center of the. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It has become possible to make luminous decorations that become dots. The LED 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that causes both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106 to be light-emitted. By appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 arranged on the lower side of the game window 101 is used to make the upper plate 301 emit light. It is a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be played. You can inform the person.

The light emission decoration of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 include 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, the central portion 106a, the right portion 106b, and the left portion 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. In addition, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 interposed therebetween, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. No. 2 system, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In light emission control, the number is 84 times, which is triple. The LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control doubles to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of 10 systems is provided even in actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or in similar colors) to spread outward with the game window 101 as the center. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with an LED (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the game board 4, the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged further outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, by appropriately emitting light from each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to give a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284, or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by making only the radial groups 104 emit light, a light emission effect is produced in which the game windows 101 are emitted radially, and at the same time as the radial groups 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted. By doing so, a light-emitting effect in which the entire outer circumference of the game window 101 is made to emit light substantially uniformly is performed, or while the first radial group 104 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light, the radial groups 104 emit light (lighting/blinking) It is possible to give a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by individually emitting light from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to provide a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) orbit.

Further, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player has a chance or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variation gaming state, a time shortening game state, a probability variation short time gaming state). , Etc.) can be performed.

Furthermore, by making each system 108a-108d of the lower group 108 light-emit appropriately, the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making it emit light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405. In addition, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guides the rotating operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108,. For each 109 or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light-emission effect with different gradations of light-emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Furthermore, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 at the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main frame base 600 A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The award ball unit 700 for and the flow of game balls from the award ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600. A ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 for

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electric parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[Main body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. 73 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). Accordingly, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is laid down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 becomes substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and the workability in assembling the main body frame 3 is improved. Is able to improve.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction in a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part, and a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 is held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side when viewed from the front, a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Of the door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, the upper bending protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 and a lower rear wall portion which spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board placing portion 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placing portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605, the game board of the game board 4 being formed. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft supporting metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, in the main body frame base 600 of this example, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is viewed from the front right side. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. With the ball hitting launcher 650 attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 67, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed with an opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the opening 614 and both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is configured to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like), and the lower rear wall portion 604 passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion which rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view to the front and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that expands in a fan shape around an axis centered on a fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported on the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, so that by making contact with the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

Further, in the main body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. As shown in FIG. 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front-rear direction on the inner side (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in the left-right direction are provided below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in front view. Then, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

Further, the main body frame base 600, when viewed from the rear, gently and obliquely descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from the middle of the up and down direction to a position slightly above to allow the game ball to roll. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is designed to be closed on the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the details will be described later, but a game ball rolling in the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740. Are supposed to roll.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is arranged at the rear end of the rear wall left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 that pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[Upper support bracket and lower support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame base 600 on the front end left end upper and lower rear view front surface of the main body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft support pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67) penetrating in the up-down direction and the front extension 632 downwardly hangs downward from the left end of the front extension 632 when viewed from the front side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) that regulates the end. In this upper shaft support member 630, a mounting portion 631, a front extending portion 632, and a stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the main body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads vertically and horizontally, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 634 that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extending portion. A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end of the front view of the front side 642b, and restricts the swinging end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame support metal fitting 644 in the lower support metal fitting 640 is attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like this.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and serve as a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are positioned on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main support frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are located coaxially with each other, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame fitting hole 634 of the door frame fitting fitting 642 in the lower fitting fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support fitting 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is not supported. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Striking ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a projecting to the front side on the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, a ball hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be rotatable integrally, a mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the ball hammer 656, and a trajectory of movement of the mallet 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of a hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in a front view and is attached to the front surface of a launch base 652 with a predetermined position above as the base end, and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. A ball stopper 662 that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 and forms a gap in which the game ball cannot pass at the same time that 658 is allowed to pass, and is held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. And a stopper 664 for restricting the rotation of the hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) from the hitting position where the played game ball can be hit.

Although not shown in detail in the drawing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650, the drive shaft 654a is adapted to reciprocally rotate at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. In addition, the batting mallet 656 of the batting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b facing the normal direction and having a mallet tip 658 fixed at the tip, and a stopper portion 656c extending toward the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664 are provided. ing. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to be substantially along the lower extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting the turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and a turning position of the hitting mallet 656 apart from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 that regulates the end (rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, and it is possible to absorb the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts, and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutting. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 102, etc., the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower part of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), is located outside the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601. A fal space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the fal space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction by a predetermined width. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example shoots the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by launching the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660. You can do it. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received in the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 which supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball and drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is adapted to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580. By (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be surely launched by the rotation of the hitting mallet 656. ing.

[Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. Further, FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and shown from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a rolling passage of a ball in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then makes a predetermined payout instruction. Based on the above, it is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. This prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper portion of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. And, a tank rail unit 730 which is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and which aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof by fastening the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 and the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a as viewed from the rear side. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 77 and 79, etc.).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. It is molded integrally with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a by a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. This prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of the vertical edge of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the ball, the prize ball passage 715 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game ball discharged from the prize ball device 740 downward, and the rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 has an escape hole 717 through which the payout motor 744 and the like which penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and which projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the back hole 717. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a mounting hole, a mounting boss, or the like for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, or the like, or the body frame base 600. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only in the right side rear portion (open side rear portion) in a plan view. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right rear portion projecting rearward of the bottom wall part 721 of the right rear portion 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed on the eaves portion 724 that extends to the rear, a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 that extends rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in plan view, and a rear end of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 and the proximal end of the shaft portion 725. An attachment portion 726 for attaching the tank 720 to the award ball tank attachment portion 711 of the award ball base 710.

In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the drawing, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end side hangs down by its own weight. .. This ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730, and It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view becomes lower toward the right side. In plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the outlet 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 is a gutter having a predetermined depth with an open upper side, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and a left end (axial support side) end in front view. The bottom is slanted so that This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 78) that project further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) when viewed from the front is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are displayed. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be moved forwards and backwards into the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls that are partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball retainer plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped by the ball leveling member 727 to the next level, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the outlet 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately prized one by one. Device 740.

It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is designed to be grounded to the outside through the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 through the grounding metal fitting 782. And, by contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated so that the protrusion 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 b to the inside of the tank rail 731. By inserting into the tank rail 731, it is possible to close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and to stop the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game balls and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b An award ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d communicating with the lower end (right side in the rear view) of the distribution space 741b in rear view and extending downward and opening to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741 are the payout rotating body 748. A rotation detection board 749 having a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a that are fixed integrally rotatably on the opposite side across the 747 and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball that is attached to the unit base 741 and rolls in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, a rotation angle sensor 752 and a payout control board 4110, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, Equipped with.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749). ), and a sensor cover 753 from the rear side, and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with a back cover 742 sandwiched therebetween, and a supply passage that can contact a game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. An earth metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 while sandwiching the motor support plate 743, and a screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and a back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 for removing and attaching.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball removal passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out on one side surface (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741a bulges rearward, and outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a by the ball break switch 750 by pressing the operating piece by the game ball. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball cut switch 750 (ball cut state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It will be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), a switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and a distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 to the grounding metal fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a is removed via the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757. You can do it.

The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 is in the form of a vertically long plate as a whole, and has an upper end bulged rearward. A button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attachment/detachment button 759 is formed on the upper part of the back cover 742, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the substantially vertical center, and a relay board mounting The sensor substrate mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and the through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be prevented. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a having a size capable of accommodating one gaming ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body is provided. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recess 748a one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are detected by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout motor is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like to the payout control board 4110, or operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is adapted to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 82, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then passed to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the pay-out motor 744 rotates the pay-out rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the side of the ball-out passage 741d, and the pay-out rotating body 748. The game balls dispensed to the ball removal passage 741d side by the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770, the main body frame base removal passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, the substrate unit 800 from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d. Can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of the present example is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled into the main body frame 3, the prize from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79 and 83. The full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. At the same time, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are full, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the upper rear part of the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base 710 is By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the entire unit is lowered from the rear end toward the front end, and the upper end of the rear end is opened substantially at the center in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). And, the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that rolls in the normal passage 773 is discharged to the front side. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end in front view and a full tank passage 775 for guiding the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 83). (See), and a full-ball outlet 776 that discharges the game ball rolling in the full-tank passage 775 to the front and opens to the left side of the normal-ball outlet 774 in front view.

Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal port 777 that opens upward at the left end of the upper rear end when viewed from the front and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball received in the removal opening 777 to the front side, and the game ball rolled in the ball removal passage 778 is discharged forward and the normal ball exit 774 at the left end in front view. And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full-ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are arranged to face each other and communicate with each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is placed in the dish unit 300. The game balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear side, and the game balls emitted from the ball outlet 779 are main body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

In this full tank branching unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b and the first ball outlet 544a of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the upper bowl 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with game balls and further game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 The game ball that cannot be ejected from the upper plate 301 side from the 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 in the upstream is also filled through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily detect foreign matter such as dust or dust that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. ..

In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are automatically Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate becomes full like a conventional pachinko machine and the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate. It is possible to prevent the driving of the game ball from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example branches the passage of the game ball paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game ball can be directly driven by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. In other words, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. You can Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided and the game can be played. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player, and the large game area 1100 can entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the receiving opening (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c are provided, the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray is provided. Even if it is exchanged, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to lack of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. ..

In addition, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to dedicate the player to the driving operation of the game ball and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storage plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, it is possible to deepen the storage dish to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls, and the player can frequently play without worrying about the storage amount. And the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. Therefore, the substantial amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full with game balls and the game balls cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls stored in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have a size in which the game balls can be rolled in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount (storage amount) of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is stored. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be adapted to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, a game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In doing so, it is possible to easily find the location of the ball clogging from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to eliminate the problem early and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to interrupt the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in a front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised via the opening/closing crank 793. And an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank for supporting the opening/closing crank 793 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, which is arranged on the front surface of the left end in front view. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

Further, the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape, which is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. Drive rod 793b extending outward from the right side to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening/closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, an abutting portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open/close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full ball outlet 776, and the like of the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the opening/closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, whereby the drive pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening/closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 contacts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening/closing shutter 792 descends and the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the urging force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, in response to opening/closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to be automatically opened. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. 87 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit which is disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 92(A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92(B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 93(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. The emission power board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the emission power board box 830 from the rear side, and the power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear surface and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front; a main side relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810; And a terminal plate 882.

The board unit base 810 of the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape that extends in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that protrudes forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position at which the center of the shield wall portion 811 in the left-right direction is lowered and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower portion of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. Cylindrical duct portion 814 penetrating through, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the rear view left side (the front view right side). ) A box accommodating portion 816, which is opened rearward and upward and is capable of accommodating the front side of the firing power supply board box 830, is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board unit base 810 sends the game ball, which has flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622, through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, it is possible to form a housing recess for housing the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 attached so as to face the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, this opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinthine passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting deep bass to the caliber of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted to the front. ing.

The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launching power supply board 831, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like via the slits 830a formed in the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

This firing power supply board box 830 is detachable from above in a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 843 of a power board box holder 840, which will be described later, and which is opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thus, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 67).

Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging electric power from the DC/DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, in the power source board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is formed on the inner wall of the upper surface. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the inner wall of the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC/DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated by being radiated to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the emission power supply board 831 can be easily replaced, which contributes to the reduction of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the launch power supply board box 830 with the launch power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the entire launch power supply board box 830.

Moreover, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly cannot be fired and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is easy. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to very easily eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute, every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a direct current power supply from an alternating current power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but it does not repeatedly charge and discharge at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. The life of the emission power supply board 831 is extremely longer than that of the emission power supply board 831. In other words, the emission power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is a separate body from the power supply board 851, so that the life is shortened. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply substrate 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short service life.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached/detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach and attach the launch power board 831, and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it harder to carry out fraud, and it is possible to prevent fraudulently changing the optimized driving strength by illegally modifying the launch power supply board 831 and making it difficult to carry out fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who feels irritated from developing into fraud such as fraud.

Further, since the emission power board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power board 831 is tampered with, the emission power board 831 is immediately replaced to tamper with it. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated early, It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 which controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced by changing the model, the launch power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC/DC converter 831a capable of realizing the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be changed to a new game. It can be matched with board 4. Therefore, the driving characteristics of the game ball can be easily adapted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is prevented from deteriorating. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached/detached from the front side, when exchanging the launch power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 to the island facility such as a game hall, The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall side can be prevented from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristic is changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control section 4120 (the payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for, and to reduce the burden on the side of the hall.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is exchanged so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, so that a problem occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced. It is possible to solve the problem by shortening the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detachable. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing a fraudulent act is entered through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being fraudulently acted on, and the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent acts can be prevented.

Further, the launch power source board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position for supporting the launch power source board box 830 is rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3, so the launch power source is probable. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily ensured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game balls discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the left front surface rather than the left-right center in a front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a side surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. And a front box housing 843 which is opened forward and upward and can house the rear side of the firing power board box 830, and the front end of the power board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 is formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600 and rolls through the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 to pass through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 to the rear of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed to the side and the game ball that has been discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described later in detail, passes through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810. The recess can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like is externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 90, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

Further, the power board box 850 is a standing wall protruding rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 of the power board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the power supply board box 850, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. Is formed so as to project to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

By the way, when connecting the connector terminal from which the wiring cord is extended to the connection terminal attached to the board and then pulling the wiring cord toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. There is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal because the terminal is pressed against the terminal side. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. A force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side can be prevented from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be made to be hard to come off and the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It can be performed, and the work process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When mounted on, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, and the connector 855 is projected by the standing wall portion 850b rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. This makes it easier to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 that is extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which causes a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Is becoming

Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power supply and the occurrence of a power failure, or the power supply terminal 853 is disengaged from the power supply board 851, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a failure.

Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 through the direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as contact failure and power failure.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved to the standing wall portion 850b side, the wiring cord 854 is hard to come off from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of work continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long and thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and the separating/cutting portions 863 are provided at one place. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened/closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removing switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc., which are attached to the payout control board 4110, face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 having a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface of the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. Also, a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 are provided.

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 of the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal board 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are made of transparent synthetic resin, respectively, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and CR unit connection terminals from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display unit or the CR unit 6 or the like installed on the island facility side is displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 92, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) which is formed on an inner upper portion of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes an upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on a lower inner portion of the board mounting portion 871a. A terminal board box locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal board 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871i. You can do it.

In addition, the board base 871 has a board cover attachment portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference of the board base 871 has a size that allows the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 to be inserted. In addition, its inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f which is arranged on the left outside of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The ridge 871e of the board base 871 is in a state in which the amount of rearward projection is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the drawing, it is possible to extend to both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is located so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged on the rear right side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view in a vertically spaced manner so as to vertically support the board box cover 875, and a pair of bearing portions 871g and a left end in the back view. And a locking portion 871h in the shape of a rectangular tube that is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a to the front (board base 871 side) and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and a vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a board base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and elastic claw-shaped members that can be locked in the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871 that are formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear. And a claw piece 873i. Although illustration is omitted, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with its front side opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving backward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

The CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. Besides, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is open to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front and rear from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 can be opened and closed together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. In other words, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are in a state of substantially contacting the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

Since the terminal board box 870 of this example uses the CR unit connection terminals 874a of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 as the D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the assembled state, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Of the projection 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an illegal tool having excellent flexibility is made to enter between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal is not bent. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit connected as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraud can be prevented. It is like this.

In addition, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, thereby making it difficult to perform fraudulent action and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

When the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 (the back surface of the board). The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion and 871c of the base 871 are connected to each other, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d and the board of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each of the impact walls 875c of the box cover 875 is present, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. By analogy, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is attempted to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board is provided. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the 874, and reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even when the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped collision wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected by the collision wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against misconduct. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent activity can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, a countermeasure is taken. Since the rear side of the opened opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cords, which has a high crime prevention capability. Can be

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal board 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal board cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It is possible to keep the protection of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such as.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. Since it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts and to detect fraudulent acts, it is possible to hesitate to perform fraudulent acts against those who perform fraudulent acts, and enhance deterrence against fraudulent acts. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface side of the main body frame 3 such that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is turned to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 is turned to the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal board 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control section 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and a door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in FIG. 5, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

In addition, the main relay terminal board 880 is a rotation position detection sensor of the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining lending display portion 363, the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94(A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 95 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover taken apart and seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball that is formed on the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main body portion 902 in front view. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the back cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the fastening mechanism 920 of the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating to the left side in the front-rear direction in the rear view of the lower locking piece 923a of the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking hole 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking hole 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally elongated slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, which is attached so as to sandwich the guide member 923. And a holding member 925. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw part 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is locked. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side of the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 that is locked in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening and the fastening can be performed simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released and the back cover 900 can be opened and closed easily and the maintainability can be improved.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a connection cutout 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end of the main body 902 on the right side in a front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates a rectangular shape on the upper side in a front view of the connection cutout 910. The main body 902 is provided with a rectangular notch for confirmation 914 and a confirmation notch 914 at the lower left corner of the main body 902.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is in a state of being closed to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 through the connection cutout 910. Etc. are facing the rear side. Further, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the check opening 912 so as to face the rear side, and also to check the back cover 900. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Accordingly, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 of the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front and are wide and extend long in the up-down direction and are arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. These through holes 918 make the back cover 900 closed to the main body frame 3 and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 to hold the game board 4 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second board on the game board 4. It is located behind a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3252, so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily provided. It can be exhausted. By the way, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

Thereby, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Therefore, when the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing the pachinko machine from falling off can be provided.

Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from coming off from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since the back cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 through the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be secured in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and at the same time, the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap between and the long hole 923b.

Further, an accommodation recess for accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover of the main body frame 3. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 can be closely attached. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. In addition to being able to do so, it can improve the appearance.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion so as to be screwed with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening can be performed only by pulling, as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 cannot be easily removed, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activity can be obtained.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921), It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Therefore, the male screw part 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking hole 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking hole. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be pivotally moved around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908 for engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the rear cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, thereby the fastening by the fastening member 924. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 at only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b through the insertion hole 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened even if the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released for maintenance or the like. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[Side security plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a U-shape that is shallow in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed above and below the front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side piece 952a that extends in the vertical direction with a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and the front end of the side piece 952a is viewed from the front right. A front end piece 952b extending in a direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front surface from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d and the front constituent member 1110 in the game board 4. The left side when viewed from the front with the game panel 1150 is designed to be inserted (see FIG. 112).

In the side crime prevention plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In the side crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side plate. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-shaped protrusion 166, and to prevent a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 112). Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength/rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 is enhanced, and the strength of the entire main body frame 3 is enhanced so that the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the like can be favorably supported. It has become.

Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (intruded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted in the U-shaped side. Since it is in a state of being sandwiched by the projecting piece 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the pivotal support side of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 by contact, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented, which can prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Moreover, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the side crime prevention plate 950 on the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5 (axial support side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a burr. It is possible to favorably prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread even if they are gouged by another tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the length of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction is increased. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the side crime prevention plate 950 from being forcibly bent and performing fraudulent acts. ..

Further, since the side face crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the side face crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and in comparison with the case where the metal plate is bent, there are defects such as strength reduction during processing. The side crime prevention plate 950 can be made as small as possible and has high durability and strength.

[Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97(A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 98(A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98(B) is a sliding lever for a glass door and a main body frame which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. FIG. 3C is a rear perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding lever for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in an upper part of a front end right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in a lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the bottom of the base 1001.

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and has a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base 1001 has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is integrated into a base formed in an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached so that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is U-shaped. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the open side (rear side) and the closed side (front side). The hook through opening 1002, the upper side of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw stopper portion 1003 protruding outward toward the middle, and the screw stopper portion An upper end portion and a middle portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 is provided, and the lower end portions of the open-side side surfaces 1001a and 1001b project forward. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fastening portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is the hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 603 of the main body frame base 600 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other when the screw locking portion 621 is moved upward after being inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the lock device 1000.

The lock device 1000 is mounted by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw stoppers 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described below and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also attached to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base body 1001 on the upper side, the lower side, and the front side are provided with the hook holes 620 for the door in the upper side and the lock locking holes. Since it has a structure in which the locking device 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting part 625 with a screw, the locking device 1000 is extremely simple in structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking protrusion 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the fixing structure on the rear side is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle, and lower sides of the both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower three positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the elongated rivet holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower part thereof and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 when the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are attached at two upper and lower positions for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that biases the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a side escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly move the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 99, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first tampering prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base body 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 opens vertically in a plate-shaped surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined to the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 in the front upper oblique direction so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 is provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. Is oscillated (clockwise in FIG. 101B).

Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from an outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position from which the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restricting protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 that penetrate through the restricting protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. Further, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, whereby the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

In addition, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 rotatably by the connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second tampering prevention member 1032 connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted "te" shape, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base body 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door hook hole 620 (see FIG. 67 and FIG. 72) formed in the main body frame base 600 protrudes forward to open the door. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. It should be noted that the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet slot 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side faces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, there is provided a guide projecting piece 1043 which projects in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically long so as not to interfere with the raising operation of the rod 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that has penetrated the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding movement of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at an upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 allows the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base body 1001. It is like this.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured so that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the door frame sliding rod 1040 to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 at the rear of the lower portion of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 interferes with the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, Equipped with. That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of one vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating in a lateral direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the upper hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The long hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the long hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the down engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the lower portion of the outer frame 2 on the inner side of the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In the normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 is rotated to lower the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the second engaging projection 1018 when the second engaging projection 1018 is rotated. The distal end of the can form a movable space. In addition, a guide protrusion 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding member 1040 are inserted. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without backlash.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and superposed. In a state where they are overlapped with each other, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body frame After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

When this rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet elongated holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is closed. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is bridged between the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second improper prevention. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

In this way, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part is formed so as to project on the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear part is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. As shown in FIG. 100, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the biasing force of the spring 1048, and connects it. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 100A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 upward claw portions and the closing plates 24 and 25 are again locked, so that the main body frame sliding rod is moved. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

Note that when the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame causes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 ascends upward by contacting with the upper end of the door frame, and the downward facing claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. A door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of an upper end portion, a central portion, and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to reliably lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire from between them. You are unable to perform any act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment unlocks the body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In addition, the locking device 1000 of this example does not engage in an illegal act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032. The second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. In this structure, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tamper-proof member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 tamper-proof. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging notch portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to unlock the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the whole of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, so that the hooked portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from each other, and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 101(A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after releasing, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 are pulled down. This prevents fraudulent tools from entering the enclosed space, so that fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame sliding rod 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose lateral width is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the conventional L-shaped base is integrated. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base body 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is extremely increased, and even if the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. It is impossible to easily carry out a fraudulent act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws, With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the lock device 1000 of the present example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 have a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that mounts the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is lock mounted. A lock mounting hole that is screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of the present example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base body (lock base body), and a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a peripheral wall portion 605. The structure may be such that it can be housed, and the same effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (forward and backward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. In the rear wall of the prize ball base 710, the prize ball tank 720 storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710b, and game balls released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Part of the award ball device 740 attached to the rear side of 710b has a transparent sphere device 740 and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is substantially the rear face of the tank rail unit 730 and the award ball device 740. Since the transparent back cover 900 arranged in the same plane is provided, the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900 and the like. A pachinko machine 1 that can visually check the rear side surface and can easily inspect the rear side of the game board 4 (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. can do.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is attached to and detached from the front side of the 601 side, remove them. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear surface or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it is possible to easily find out, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is possible to easily find out an illegal device attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described operational effects are reliably exhibited. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, so that it is possible to prevent it from catching or abutting on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusions to the rear. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like, and thus the game board. It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like easier to see, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, and the trouble such as the deformation of the member such as the synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the game ball passes through the slit 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 106(A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 106(B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

In addition, FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like, seen from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 107 taken in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like when viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG.

As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 in which a player operates a handle device 500 to hit a game ball, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls a game content performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180, which is capable of displaying the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, is provided. This game board 4 is not shown in FIGS. 102 to 109 and will be described in detail later, but further includes a front unit attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. It is provided (see FIG. 113, FIG. 116, etc.).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 of this example is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 that extends in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise as viewed from the front, an end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113, and the outer rail 1111. Of the game area 1100 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1112 and the stop portion 1114 to which the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 can be brought into contact. From the upper end of the inner rail 1112, which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111, which is arranged at the lowermost end and is lowered toward the rear, and the upper rail of the inner rail 1112. Only the closed position that extends upward and the open position that rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front to open the space between the outer rail 1111 and the closed position can return to the closed position side. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown).

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed. By jumping over the space, it can be driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when a game ball is strongly hit in the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by bringing the game ball into contact with this stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, by the outlet guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1113, it is guided to the outlet 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the outlet 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hit ball launching device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located under the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. In addition to being able to play, the game ball can be repelled inward.

In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially vertical center along the inner rail 1113 from the lower side of the outlet guide surface 1115. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118 in the form of a groove extending from the front end to a predetermined depth. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. As a result, even if an injustice tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the injustice tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

Further, in the front component member 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime projection 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even in the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projection piece 182, a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

The front constituent member 1110 is vertically spaced apart from the front end on the right side in the front end, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 arranged at the left end on the front side in the vertical direction so as to be recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged as a set, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is opened downward, and is formed in an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side, Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage notch 1122 that is notched in a rectangular shape and extends upward in the left-right direction from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 mounted inside the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be attached to the game board stopper 1120. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a state in which the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is seen in a front view. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, so that the game board 4 is held in the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full-tank branching unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center of the lower side of the through hole 1123 in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in front view for sticking a certificate stamp for proof confirmation are provided. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band in the fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component member 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. In addition, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the game panel 1150, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at a lower portion in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end on the left side in the front view at the lower end. And a downward opening of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front and rear direction of the function display unit 1180 and a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 and having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted is provided.

Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the lower left and right ends, and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 (see FIG. 105) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front and the lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1157 that is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and that is cut out so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided to the rear by the out-out guide surface 1115 thus entered enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box-like shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the top surface of the bottom wall portion has an out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and are discharged (discharged) from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and are supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160. It is adapted to be discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. The out-ball discharging portion 1161 is located directly above the discharging-ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the gaming board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are designed such that the tips are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1520, and are fitted with the rear ends of the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is threaded from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126 to attach the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 while being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side at the rear end left side end of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear side. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. This main control board box 1170 is a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1172. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and is fixed to the fixing piece 1174 that fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right and left ends in a rear view by sandwiching the elastic fixing pieces 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. Possible sealing part 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal. A protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating/cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Is becoming As a result, it is possible to visually and clearly determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened.

Since the main control board box 1170 is provided with four sealing portions 1176 in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened/closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the misconduct.

Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100f exposed from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and hermetically sealed seal are cleverly worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by other than visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display portion 1181 and the front component member 1110 are arranged so as to be visible from the player side on the front face of the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

On the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 106(A), a game state that changes depending on a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view. A game state indicator 1183 for one LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183 for displaying the number of holdings of the game balls to the first starting opening 2101. For the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the first special symbol memory display 1184 arranged on the right side, the lottery result of the first special symbol is selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (first Special lottery result) 1st special symbol indicator 1185 which consists of one 7 segment LED for displaying as 1st special symbol, and 1st special symbol indicator 1185 is arranged diagonally right above to 2nd starting mouth 2102 Second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball as the second special symbol, The second special symbol memory display 1187, which is composed of two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the two special symbol display device 1186, for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102, ing.

Further, in the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180, the number of reservations regarding the passage of the universal figure gate 2301 by the game balls, which are arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display device 1186. Normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying, and a normal lottery result that is a lottery drawn by the game ball being arranged below the normal symbol memory display passing the universal gate 2301 The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for displaying as, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which are arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side of the normal symbol memory display 1188 are "big hit (condition device is The round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of times (round number) the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 is repeated.

The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and the color of the emitted light and the lighting and blinking. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display various game states (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, probability variation short game state, big hit game state, etc.). In the present embodiment, at least the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the right hitting game state can be displayed. Particularly, in the present embodiment, a game state that is advantageous for the player if a game ball is shot (so-called “left hit”) in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role object 2500, and a game on the right side of the center role object 2500. If a game ball is shot in the area 1100 (so-called "right hitting"), a game state that is advantageous to the player is mixed, so the player is clearly informed of the timing of "right hitting". As a result, even a beginner in the game can smoothly switch the striking method (striking operation) with the transition of the gaming state without making a mistake in striking “left hit” and “right hit”.

The game status indicator 1183 is not limited to one color LED, but may be a plurality of LED groups or 7-segment LEDs. Any configuration may be used as long as the player shifts his or her line of sight to the game status indicator 1183 during the game so that the player can easily understand the current game status, in particular, the game status in which the player should hit the right side.

Further, the function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and this control signal is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, which will be described later, to the player in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is preferable to notify "right hit". Normally, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in the front view of the player (the tip of the front line of sight), so when the "right hit" is informed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the line of sight is directed to the left end portion in the front view. The player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (driving operation) without moving.

Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball was received in the first starting opening 2101. In this case, the start of variable display is held (stored) and the number of held (memorized) first special symbols is displayed. This first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b. -The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Lights together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball was received in the second starting opening 2102. In this case, the start of variable display is displayed as a hold number (memorized number) of the second special symbol that has been held (stored). This second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b. -The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a, 1187b. Lights up together, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED is stopped for a predetermined period of time according to the special lottery result, and then stopped, and the light-emitting pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED causes The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red/green/orange color LED that is capable of changing its luminescent color, and is a combination of luminescent color to be emitted and lighting/blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game balls passing through the universal figure gate 2301. The display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then is stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be variably displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the universal symbol gate 2301, the start of variable display The number of reserved (memorized) ordinary symbols that have been reserved (stored) is displayed. This normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved symbols of normal symbols. Incidentally, in this example, up to four variable display of the normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b made of predetermined LEDs, and by turning on these indicator lamps, the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed. It is like this.

As shown in FIG. 106(A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be seen from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. Moreover, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol storage The display device 1188, the normal pattern display device 1189, and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board (not shown). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, the function The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so the player or game The position of the display portion 1181 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. 106(B). In this example, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 configured by 7-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are respectively configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effect as the above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, so 7 Compared to the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming uncomfortable during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more entertaining by devoting attention to the movable effect and effect image.

[Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150, and is a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100. Has been formed. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8-10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and that are formed as circular holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. Equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and the lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 of the center accessory 2500 or the like, and the attacker devices 2100, 2150, etc. are attached to the openings 1215 from the front side. The unit that it has is inserted and fixed.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board described above (in this example, approximately 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner, and has a holding step portion 1221 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and inside the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front surface is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be filled in the clearance.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with engagement claws 1224 and engagement pieces 1225 that engage with the engagement step 1213 at positions corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 1221 to the front side. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is arranged on the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 and the panel. A predetermined amount of space is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 has a recessed shape above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height in a state in which the rear surface side outer peripheral portion projects rearward, and the recessed amount ( The depth) is set to a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 116) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from projecting rearward of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be prevented from protruding from the main frame 3. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing predetermined screws in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a front flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c of the back box 3010 (shown in the figure). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small diameter inner hole are mixed, and the mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is attached according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within the range. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is designed to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball emitted from the ball striking device 650. However, the guide is smooth. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a thinned-out portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, support them, and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-shaped rib is formed.

In addition, in this panel holder 1220, a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) and an assembly jig is formed, and the game panel 1150 is held in the obstacle nail implanting device. It is possible to set it in the state of being. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1120, and a laterally long penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end on the front side and downward Is opened to the front passage 1112 of the front component 1110, and the ball passage notch 1123 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122, and the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 108 ). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing the panel holder 1220 to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is provided on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 of the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and by fitting the out ball discharge groove 1235 with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 is relatively moved in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

In the gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225 and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel plate 1210, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail arranging device without modifying the arranging device, thereby increasing the cost for arranging the obstacle nail G. It can be suppressed.

Although not shown in the figure, the game panel 1200 of this example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. In addition, the front unit 2000 can be attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200 even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and it is a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 is visible to the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

In addition, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 compatible with various models can be provided by only replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in advance in a predetermined arrangement, the mounting positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, it is possible to make the panel holder 1220 a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a different form from the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. The gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 shown in FIGS. 110 and 112 are the same as the embodiment shown in FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example in FIGS. 107 to 109 except that the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The front constituent member 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above-mentioned front constituent member 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and is not provided with a function display unit 1180. The points are very different. Note that the other configurations are the same as those of the previous component 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using this front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). Prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending inward in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the out-port guide surface 1115 as a base point up to the stop portions 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arcuate shape is formed between the stopper portion 1114 and the right-hand certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged immediately below the stopper portion 1114, and the lower end of the arcuate portion is connected to the outlet port. The area up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a straight line inclined so as to decrease toward the out-port guide surface 1115.

The front component member 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 as compared with the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the player can be more enjoyed by the wide game region 1100. You can do it.

[Crime prevention structure for pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board accommodated.

First, as shown in FIG. 112, the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcement unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side-face crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy), and its vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 are combined. The side-face crime prevention plate 950 includes a plate-shaped side piece 952a that extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end that extends from the front end of the side-side piece 952a to a substantially right-angled inner side (open side). The piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of space behind the front end piece 952b, and a piece extending substantially inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side surface piece 952a. The height of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the like can be favorably supported.

On the other hand, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by using spot welding, rivets or the like, as described above, using a plurality of elongated metal plates. The shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft supporting side is provided with a shaft supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (shaft supporting side). In the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 has a higher strength due to the shaft-supporting side U-shaped protruding piece 166, and the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft supporting side is provided. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of the present example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a space between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950 is provided. The rear side piece of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 formed in the substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is adapted to be inserted (entered), and the front end piece 952b is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched by the side U-shaped protrusions 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped projection piece 166 of the pivotal side of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the shaft support side from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened and the main body frame. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 from the door 3.

Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends rearward of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is temporarily assumed. Even if is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150), and an illegal act is performed. Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 112, the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side crime prevention plate 950 so as to cover the outside of the side crime prevention plate 950, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is able to fully counter the vandalism of. In addition, generally, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it becomes almost impossible to intrude an unauthorized tool to the rear side of the rear end of the middle piece 952c, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 113, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 that houses the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full-tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be replaced by the game board 4. It can be seen from the rear side of the body frame 3 without removing it from the body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device and enhance the deterrence against the illegal activity. ing.

Further, from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and therefore the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. Even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, waste cloth for cleaning, dust and dirt remain between the main frame 3 and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is detached from the outside It is possible to easily find out from them, and it is possible to prevent some troubles from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board of the pachinko machine is opened. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear, and FIG. 117 is disassembled for each main member (however, the center accessory 2500 is not shown) constituting the game board to be obliquely rearward. It is the perspective view seen.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and when a player operates the handle device 500, a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated. It is provided with a frame-shaped front component member 1110A that defines and forms the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200.

The game panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel plate 1210 which is plate-like and has a smaller outer shape than the front component member 1110A and which can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A. , A frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that is detachably held from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in the transparent panel plate 1210.

In addition, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. A function display unit 1180 arranged at a position which is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and is visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1. A liquid crystal display device 1900, which is attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and has a rectangular display screen (display area) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000 is covered from the back side. Thus, the board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position on the way. A center character 2500 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center character 2500.

Further, behind the center accessory 2500, there is provided an effect display device 1900 that performs an effect display with a large area in front view so as to attract the player's attention. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information in which decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like are combined is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as effect display device 1900.

Further, above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a display area smaller than that of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information obtained by combining decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like.

On the other hand, from the right side area to the lower side area of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100, the universal figure gate 2301, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker device 2100, the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, and the second opening are sequentially arranged from the upstream side. A starting port 2102 is provided. On the other hand, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided in the left side area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Further, in the lower area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, a permanent winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 is provided.

Here, the first starting opening 2101 is in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction, and is a regular winning opening 2101a in which a game ball is always winable below the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the gaming area 1100. It is configured to have a special winning opening 2101b in which a game ball can be won only when a movable piece (normal electric accessory) 2111 operates on the right side. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b), a first starting opening sensor 3131 (see FIG. 118) described later enters the winning ball (winning prize). ) Is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied, based on a random number for the first special symbol that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical value range, an attacker described later. The first special symbol lottery (first special determination) is performed for the hit that becomes the operation trigger of the device 2100, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. It When the winning is won, the drive control of an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later and includes a solenoid and the like, is performed after this variable display is completed, whereby the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed. Get to work. After the attacker device 2100 is opened/closed in this way, it is possible to control the shift to a later-described time saving game state in which the ease of winning the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is improved. ..

In addition, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and by starting the variation of the second special symbol. The symbol variation according to the result of the first special symbol lottery cannot be placed in the variation start waiting state.

The general-purpose gate 2301 is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to allow a game ball hit in the right side area of the center accessory 2500 to pass therethrough. Then, when the game ball is received (passed) to the universal figure gate 2301, it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 118) described later that the game ball has been received.

Then, at this time, if a predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied, based on a random number for a normal symbol that is regularly updated (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical value range, the movable piece (normal) The determination process (ordinary determination) for the normal hit which is the operation trigger of the electric accessory 2111 is performed, and the normal symbol dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the normal win is won, the drive control of a normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later and is configured to include a solenoid, is performed after this variable display is completed. By this drive control, the movable piece 2111 is allowed to receive the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 through the opening operation in which the upper end is rotated rightward (clockwise) around the lower end. ..

In other words, the special winning opening 2101b is set in the game ball (win Sphere) It is provided so that winning is possible. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 allows the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 (rejecting ball mode) and allows the same ball to enter (rejection ball). It can be said that it is operable in such a manner as to switch to a ball mode) and is maintained in a refusal ball mode unless drive control of the normal accessory driving mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, basically, in the special winning opening 2101b, the winning of the game ball hardly occurs in the normal game state (non-time saving game state). On the other hand, in the time saving game state, the game ball is driven into the right side region of the center accessory 2500 in the game region 1100 (right hitting), which improves the acceptability of the game ball. A game centering on a game (first special symbol lottery) corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the winning opening 2101b is realized.

Further, the second starting opening 2102 is provided below the special winning opening 2101b, is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500, and the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker device 2100 and the special winning opening of the first starting opening 2101. A game ball that is not accepted by the mouth 2101b is configured to be able to enter. Then, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102, the entry (winning) of the game ball is detected by a second starting opening sensor 3132 (see FIG. 118) described later. Then, at this time, if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied, based on a random number for the second special symbol that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical value range, an attacker described later. The second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit that is the operation trigger of the device 2100, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display device 1186 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. It Then, when the hit is obtained, drive control of an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later and includes a solenoid or the like, is performed after the end of this variable display, whereby the attacker device 2100 is operated. Will be opened and closed.

Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to be capable of accepting a game ball that is driven into the right side region of the center role object 2500 in the game region 1100 in the open state. Has been done.

The attacker device 2100 is composed of a special winning opening 2103, an opening/closing member 2106 operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) for driving the opening/closing member 2106 to open and close, Normally, it is closed by an opening/closing member 2106 so that the game ball cannot be received in the special winning opening 2103.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the special winning opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (the first special When the special winning lottery 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 (the second special symbol side winning game), The number of balls in which the game balls are accepted is adjusted by changing the control mode for opening them.

That is, the attacker device 2100 opens the special winning opening 2103 by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of either the first special judgment or the second special judgment. As a result, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (first starting opening sensor 3131) or the second starting opening 2102 (second starting opening sensor 3132), three gaming balls are paid out, When a game ball is won in the big winning hole 2103 (count sensor 2122a) used for executing the big hit game state or the small hit game state, fifteen game balls are paid out. In addition, when the game balls are won in the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), 10 gaming balls are paid out.

By the way, in the time-saving game state (rush preparation mode in this embodiment), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is "0.08 seconds", and the movable piece 2111 is in the open state after the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped (the special winning port 2101b). The time that the game ball is maintained at the right rotation side position where the prize can be won is "5.5 seconds". That is, when a game ball passes through the universal figure gate 2301, a normal win is always won, and a time (0 when the game ball passed through reaches the movable area of the movable piece 2111). By stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol in (0.08 seconds), the gaming ball that has triggered the normal winning is allowed to enter the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 as it is. According to such a configuration, in the time saving game state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from winning in the second starting port 2102 which is provided further below the special winning port 2101b and can receive the flown down game ball. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second special symbol lottery in the time saving game state in which the execution of the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b is preferred.

In addition, the movable piece 2111 is maintained in the open state (the position where the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2101b) for "5.5 seconds", and then the movable piece 2111 is closed (the game ball is placed in the special winning opening 2101b). It operates so that it will be in the unacceptable position).

Therefore, in the time saving game state (rush preparation mode), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is further rotated to the right for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, by hitting the right side, it becomes easy to win the game ball to the special winning port 2101b. Therefore, in the time saving game state rush preparation mode), not the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a) but a large number of game balls to the first starting opening 2101 (special winning opening 2101b) It is considered advantageous for the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the right side of 2500 (so-called “right hit”).

On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state (normal mode and rush mode in the present embodiment), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is a predetermined variation time (for example, 1 second). ), it is impossible to accept the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101.

It should be noted that even if it is in the non-time saving game state, it is advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball by aiming at the left or right of the center role object 2500 depending on whether it is the probability variation game state or not. In the normal game state (normal mode) which is the non-time saving game state and not the probability variation game state, the left side of the center role object 2500 is set so that many game balls are won in the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101. It is considered advantageous for the player to aim and shoot a game ball (so-called "left hit"). Further, in the non-time saving game state and the high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), which is a probability variation game state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal game state, many game balls are in the second starting opening 2102. It is more advantageous for the player to shoot a game ball (so-called “right hit”) aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so as to win the prize.

Further, as the time saving control, the control to increase the winning probability of the above-mentioned normal symbol from the non-time saving game state, the control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol from the non-time saving game state, the first starting opening 2101 Control for extending the period for maintaining the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b at the right rotation side position than the non-time saving game state, the number of times of moving the movable piece 2111 to the right rotation side position is greater than the non-time saving game state. Any one of the increasing controls or an arbitrary combination (may be all) may be executed.

Further, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and the rear wall 3010a has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. A back box 3010 in which 3010b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, a back production unit 3200 arranged in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010b, and a back box. A lower back production unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in 3010, and a lower back right arranged between the lower back production unit 3400 and the front decoration unit 3100 in a lower right corner of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The rendering unit 3600 is mainly provided. The front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4, a peripheral control board for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118) having a peripheral control section 4140 and a liquid crystal control section 4150, which will be described later in detail. A box 1910 is provided.

The game board 4 of the present embodiment is a wide area in which the game balls can be sufficiently rolled between the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (inner circumference of the front component member 1110A). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100.

In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (it is hit with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the game ball is upstream of the hitting portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. The right side passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500 flows down from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down one by one, and the game balls that have flowed down the right passage 2545 are decelerated by the stop portion 1114, and then, first, the path of the right passage 2545. The general map gate 2301 arranged above is reached. Then, the attacker device 2100 is guided to the movable region of the opening/closing member 2106. In this movable area, the game ball that has not been received by the special winning opening 2103 by the opening/closing member 2106 is then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. The game ball flowing down and to the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding portion 2901 and converted in the downflow direction, and then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. Here, the game ball that has passed through the upper general-purpose gate 2301 is guided to the special winning opening 2101b in a state where the game ball is received by the movable piece 2111.

In the movable area of the movable piece 2111, the game ball that was not guided by the movable piece 2111 to be received by the special winning opening 2101b is decelerated again by the second guiding portion 2902 and then guided to the second starting opening 2102. To be done. The game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is guided to the second starting port 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless it enters either the special winning opening 2103 or the special winning opening 2101b.

As described above, in the time saving game state, the game ball that has been hit to the right and passed through the universal figure gate 2301 will be accepted by the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 with a probability of almost 100%.

When a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of either of the first special judgment and the second special judgment as a result of such a game being played, the special winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106. By doing so, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player.

[Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 117 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides, and can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902. ing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adapted to be inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and is projected from the right side in front view. One fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side of the back box 3010 in rear view, and the other fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3050. By sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion opening, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 in which a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 118), and the like, and a lower portion of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. It has become.

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-luminance white LED as a backlight.

[Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the drawing, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls a payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. .. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first start opening sensor 3131 for detecting a game ball received in the first start opening 2101 and a second start opening sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start opening 2102. 3132 and the detection signal from the general winning a prize sensor 3133 which detects the game ball received in the general winning a prize 2201 are respectively inputted through the main control I/O port 4100b, the gate sensor 2302, the count sensor 2122 (count). The detection signals from the sensor 2122a, the count sensor 2122b), the specific sensor 2580, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 are the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4, and the main control I/O port 4100b. It is designed to be input via.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the normal accessory drive mechanism 2114, through the panel relay board 3040. Drive signals are output to the attacker drive mechanism 2121, the winning opening distribution drive motor 2558, and the specific area distribution drive motor 2559, or via the main control I/O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191. First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory display 1184, second special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display 1188, game state display A drive signal is output to the device 1183 and the round display 1190.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc. performs a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 654, and a ball feeding by a ball feeding solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720. , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removal operation.

[Payout controller]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various kinds of control related to payout in the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I/O port 4111b serving as an I/O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter, referred to as “external WDT 4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. ), and a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Are provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), and for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I/O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay substrate 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the game balls stored is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 with an error LED indicator. A signal to be displayed on the 4130 is output to the error LED indicator 4130 via the payout control I/O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game 1 is issued via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board), and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other near the entrance thereof and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, it means that "count switch error" (specifically Indicates that there is a problem in the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that "retry error" (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full tank" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). That the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR unconnected" ( The fact that the electrical connection has been cut off from any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically Indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and a return request signal for a prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via the. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 through the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is issued to the payout control I/O. The information is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining number display 365c.

[Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the firing control unit 4120, which performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches for firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle body 504, and a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball according to the intention of the player. Is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a through the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle main body 504 is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main-side relay terminal board 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via.

Based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d outputs a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength that matches the rotational position of the handle main body 504, and a launch reference pulse. Is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e supplies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 through the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay substrate 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. By the output, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball sending reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the side of the hitting ball launching device 650. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see Exhibit 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. .. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted to the lamp driving board 3041 from the lamp driving board serial I/O port, or the gaming board. The motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. Door side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation light-up signal to a color LED or the like, and door-side drive light-emission data from a serial I/O port for a frame decoration drive board to a peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is displayed on the liquid crystal. In addition to transmitting from the control unit serial I/O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is inputted to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the peripheral relay terminal board 882, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The lower speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various performances are played, and the door frame 5 is connected via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music and sound effects suitable for various effects are played from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also has an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, “peripheral control external unit”) not shown. The peripheral control MPU 4140a jointly uses the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input/output port. ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. , A plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command are used. In this embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command through the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. 5 output to the LED of each decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or based on the received blinking command on the game board side, a lighting signal or a blinking signal. The decorative boards 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 and the like provided on the game board 4 output to the LEDs. Further, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 etc. which were provided in the game board 4, each solenoid, etc.

In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It may be input via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. that match various effects flow. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on both left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. To send an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal) to the lower speaker 821 for low sound. Thus, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

[Abnormal noise prevention measures]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic equipment, LEDs, sensors, and other equipment that requires power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes a side speaker 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and a lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is also connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4, and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. It has an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

Further, on the door frame base substrate 194, wirings for connecting various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors and the like to the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, etc. are gathered together and extended backward. It is adapted to be connected to the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 of the body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89 ). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

In addition, at the location (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is provided, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and the game area 1100 despite being shot by the hitting ball launching device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) that guides a game ball (foul ball) that has not arrived to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in proximity (FIG. 23).

In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, since the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, which may reach 10's of kV. There is (at most 3 to 4 kV even when pain is felt due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metal, the electric charge accumulated in the resin only escapes around the ground even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Then, due to the electrostatic induction by this electric charge, a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 that is close to the electric charge may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width (when an excessive AC voltage is generated). Occur. In that case, for example, a cracked sound such as a crackling sound is generated from the speaker, or a sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a large unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound is generated), which causes an unpleasant sound to the player. It will be felt. Moreover, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually not on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, the output tends to be set to a large value.

In the embodiment described below, it is detected whether the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-mentioned abnormal audio signal, and if the abnormal audio signal is detected, The present invention relates to an invention relating to an abnormal sound signal blocking board (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, and the like, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, these various commands are output. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 118).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and a lower portion provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the door frame base board 194, and the like. The speaker 821 and the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are controlled so that music and sound effects according to various effects are played (see FIGS. 118 and 119).

[Abnormal voice signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

As shown in FIG. 119, the door frame base board 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 arranged on the main body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and the periphery of the door frame base board 194 A +24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the wiring 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal 882 is provided. The board 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 are connected by the speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by the lower speaker harness 819.

In FIG. 120, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, the +24V voltage, the woofer + signal and the woofer which are the sound signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194. -The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

Further, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 outputs a woofer+ signal and a woofer signal, which are sound signals for the lower speaker 821, to the lower speaker 821 and supplies and outputs them to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been done. In this way, the sound signal output from the door frame base board 194 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is unlikely to be affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a place far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. In this way, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 at a location that is less likely to be affected by the static electricity noise, it is possible to stably prevent the abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal blocking board]
The abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is cut off so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

As shown in FIG. 120, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 outputs from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the sound signal is an abnormal sound signal and outputs an abnormal sound detection signal. An abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the outputted abnormality detection signal is provided.

The +24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the +24V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884. The ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

The woofer + signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884, one is input to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is It is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

The woofer signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and one is relayed in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is only connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit in which four diodes SD1 to SD4 are connected in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in the present embodiment, arranged in a subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit). It is mainly composed of an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the woofer + signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. .. The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 that supplies the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the latter stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the latter stage of the rectification bridge. The 0V line 891 that supplies 0V whose voltage is substantially 0V by cutting the minus part by the circuit is connected.

Then, in the latter stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (the + voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the +voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 after the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the +voltage line 890. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and is also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the +voltage waveform is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the +voltage line 890 at the stage subsequent to the connection point of the capacitor SC2 on the +voltage line 890, and the smoothed woofer signal after rectification, that is, the +voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR2 and SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the +voltage line 890 at the subsequent stage of the connection point of the +voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on when the transistor STR2 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil+input) of the relay SRL1. Has been done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

The base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation is connected to the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer+signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 serves as an external output of the woofer+signal and is connected to the lower speaker harness 819. Through an external lower speaker 821.

Further, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil+input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1, and the 5th of the relay SRL1 is connected. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

Since the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 to the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895. It is like this.

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal voice signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer+ signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted, In FIG. 120, a current flows from top to bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the +voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and a current flows from the upper side to the lower side through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1 in FIG. 120, from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

Thus, when a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 are also kept in the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 is not practically turned on.

<Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, so that the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Further, the relay SRL1 is in a non-operating state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, and the B contact between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is inoperative (the contact is in a closed state) and the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal are inoperative. It is the A contact (the state where the contact is open). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer+signal of the woofer+signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input]
[Operation when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage is input]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal sound signal (for example, a constant voltage of +24V, +18V, +1.5V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, the diode SD2 and the diode SD2 and the diode are provided in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. SD3 becomes conductive, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom in electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, the increase in the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to the increase in the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is not applied. This approaches the constant voltage, and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistors SR2 and SR4) , A resistor SR5, a Zener diode SZD1, a resistor SR6, and a resistor SR7, and a voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (a voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 turns on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 turns on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the No. terminal and the terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact between the terminals 5 and 6 of the relay SRL1 is in the operating state (the contact is open), and the connection between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal is in the operating state. It becomes the A contact (the state where the contact is closed). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are switched to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer+signal of the woofer+signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer+signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

Further, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 becomes the ground. It is pulled down and the transistor STR3 is turned off.

On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows in the route of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. A transition to a flowing conductive state is maintained, and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 of the woofer+ signal remains blocked.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs the abnormality detection signal (photo coupler). Turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 receives the abnormal sound detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal voice is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 remains blocked by the woofer+ signal. Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority being to prevent speaker damage. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal voice signal can be grasped by a staff member, or when the output stop state of the voice is confirmed, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is released by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to a normal initial state.

[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input due to the audio signal being extremely amplified, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 become conductive, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. To be done.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and the charging current flows from the upper side to the lower side in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal audio signal, even if the peak-shaped waveform has the same width in the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 to rapidly charge the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid increase in charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal sound signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, it will be briefly described.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and the transistor STR3 is turned on, so that the relay SRL1 operates and the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are cut off. Then, the output of the woofer+signal on the woofer+signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer+signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abnormal sound from being generated due to the abnormal audio signal of the excessive AC voltage which is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making an unpleasant sound.

[LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 118, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the above, and a character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in this character ROM 4150d.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the first. The drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d in time series when the data is transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c adopts a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" is such that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit in the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when various people are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device are set such that these sprites are set in a position on the screen or in a vertical relationship when the sprites are overlapped with each other (hereinafter, referred to as "order of sprite superposition"). 3252.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a comparatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 characters arranged in horizontal 2×vertical 3 can be used for expression. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, more characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 have main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front thereof, and the main scanning intersecting the one direction. The sub-scanning is performed by repeatedly performing the main scanning in the direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 moves from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. And sequentially output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, the next line is drawn. Based on the drawing data for one minute, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line as main scanning from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Control processing in the main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 149, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described.

[Main processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board of the present embodiment. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU are set (normal initial settings), according to the backup data stored in the RAM. , Interrupt timing, etc.).

When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. Further, if the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is on, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has started to the peripheral control unit 4140 to a transmittable state when the normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress status of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is shut off. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, the power-on process is executed.

When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for games. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, Supply to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the power supply board stops supplying the power supply voltage to the main control board 4100. Sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects the power failure advance notice signal in step S2, the power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

This power failure occurrence process is performed when the power supply voltage (24V in the present embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is changed from the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of occurrence of a power failure as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power-off occurrence processing is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of detection of a power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3).

[Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs in this embodiment. The power failure occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure notice signal is detected in the main process.

The main control MPU 4100a first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained when the power is restored.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the processing at the time of power failure occurred in the backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). Upon completion of the above processing, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for power supply stop. In addition, in this process, if the power supply interruption process is started because the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”), it is actually Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even if the power-off occurrence process is entered due to the instantaneous power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on, after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

The main control MPU 4100a first executes the register saving process (step S10), and then executes the processes of steps S11 to S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-described switches (gate switch, starting opening sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of gaming balls is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the special control processing of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker drive mechanism 2121). The opening/closing member 2106) for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103 is controlled to execute a process of changing the open/closed state of the special winning opening 2103.

In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process for winning or losing the normal hit which is an operation trigger of the movable piece 2111 is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the movable piece 2111 becomes higher if a specific condition (ON of the time saving flag) is satisfied after the end of the big hit game state. Is configured to execute (so-called time saving game state). In addition, in the present embodiment, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state, and this is set to a long time as the operation time when the movable piece 2111 operates. By doing so, it is possible to realize a time saving game state in which it is easier to accept the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 than in the normal state (non-time saving game state).

In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), a drive signal is output to a special figure starting memory display (not shown). Processing, and so on. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to the peripheral control unit 4140 is also performed. When the processes of steps S11 to S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process is ended.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a big hit determination random number used for the determination of whether or not to generate a big hit game state (also called big hit determination, big hit lottery), and a big hit game state in big hit determination Random number for the big hit symbol used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to do, determination of whether to generate a small hit game state instead of the big hit (also called small hit determination, small hit lottery ) Used for small hit determination random numbers, small hits used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to generate a small hit game state in the small hit determination, big hit lottery and small hit Reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform high-expectation production such as reach production when it is determined not to be hit by lottery, special symbol display devices 1185, 1186 Variable display pattern random number (random time random number) used to determine the variable display pattern of the symbol (fluctuation time etc.), opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 in the big hit (small hit) game (special bonus game) (the number of rounds) Random number for round determination used to determine, etc., the movable piece 2111 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2101b is controlled to an open state (a state in which the upper end is located at a position rotated clockwise around the lower end). There is a random number for ordinary win determination, which is used for determining whether or not (normal lottery win determination).

In addition, the big hit symbol random number is also used for the determination regarding the type of state of the big hit (whether or not the time saving function is activated) performed when it is determined that the big hit is won.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit (small hit) determination random number related to the big hit (small hit) lottery, a big hit (small hit) symbol random number, a round decision random number, and the movable piece 2111 are opened. The random number for normal symbol hit determination related to whether or not to control is updated. That is, the random number used for the big hit (small hit) lottery and the determination related to the opening/closing control of the movable piece 2111 is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability of determining that a big hit (small hit) game state is generated, probability of determining that the movable piece 2111 is controlled to be in the open state) in a predetermined period for each random number is made constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number updating process 2, the reach determination random numbers, the variable display pattern random numbers, and the like that are not related to the big win (small win) lottery and the normal lottery are updated.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process of this embodiment.

In the special control process, first, the first and second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed. In this first/second starting opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. Then, after the first and second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed, the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled, and the first special The first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progress of the game on the symbol side is controlled is sequentially performed. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can change simultaneously, As a result, even if the symbol variation on the one side starts, the symbol variation on the other side will not be stopped.

[1st and 2nd starting mouth prize winning processing]
Next, the first/second starting opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of the first and second starting opening winning processings of the present embodiment.

In the first/second starting opening winning process (step S110), roughly, the process of determining whether a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, and the winning On condition that it is determined that there is, a process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132, it is determined that the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and are provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter is less than 1, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 1 (the second hold number counter is 0), the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as the second start pending storage process (step S203), various data obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol) Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the holding history update processing (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second holding number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step S203, a prize notification command indicating that there is a prize for the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.) is set, and The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, the peripheral control unit 4140 can control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like to promptly update the pending display on the second starting port 2102 side through the control.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value is 1, then, as a process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131, it is determined that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (YES in step S205), and then Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot random numbers, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as the first start pending storage process (step S207), various data obtained by winning the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol random number) Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the holding history update processing (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM.

Even in the process of step S207, a prize notification command indicating that there is a prize for the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, the peripheral control unit 4140 can control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like to promptly update the pending display on the first starting opening 2101 side.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not been won in the first starting opening 2101, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting opening winning processings are finished at this point.

In the present embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting opening 2102 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting opening 2101 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. .. However, instead of this, a mode in which the winning process for the second starting port 2102 is executed after the winning process for the first starting port 2101 may be executed.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a leading determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may send a command indicating the result of the leading determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the jackpot lottery, the probability variation lottery, and the variation display pattern determination described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance. Is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The leading determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the precedence determination process, by comparing the random number with the precedence determination table, the lottery result (whether the big hit (small hit), the type of the big hit, and the variation display pattern) when the lottery using the random number is performed. Etc.) is determined (the determination performed in advance of the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect that reflects the received prize notification command (advance determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "prefetching". Also referred to as "directing").

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the advance determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) that controls the progress of the game on the first special symbol side, and the second special symbol control process (step S14b) that controls the progress of the game on the second special symbol side Each detailed procedure of and will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, unlike the execution procedure of control, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) will be described first.

[First special symbol control processing]
Next, the first special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. 126. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process on the first special symbol side of the present embodiment. In the first special symbol control process, the above-mentioned first and second starting mouth winning process (FIG. 125) and the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later in the special control process (FIG. 124) are executed. This is the process that will be executed later.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the interlocking flag on the first special symbol side is in the on state (step S100a). The interlocking flag of the first special symbol is a flag that is set to ON when the game on the first special symbol side is to be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side can be advanced at the same time. In such a control structure, there is a concern that the hit big hit game (small hit game) may occur between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. In order to avoid it, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in the game on one side, the interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is operated in the ON state. Therefore, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later is a big hit (small hit).

When the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S100a), the main control MPU 4100a does not perform the process (steps S130a to S200a) corresponding to the first process flag, The 1-linkage setting process is executed (step S250a). The details of the first interlocking setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

On the other hand, the main control MPU4100a, in the process of step S100a, if the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is in the OFF state (NO in step S100a), the original game of the first special symbol side As a game situation where progress is allowed, the state of the first processing flag indicating the progress situation of the game on the first special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU4100a, among the plurality of processing shown in the figure (step S130a ~ step S200a), selectively the processing that matches the state of the first processing flag (progress of the game on the first special symbol side) Since it is executed, the game on the side of the first special symbol will be properly advanced.

More specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the first processing flag is 0 (step S120a), and if the first processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120a), 1. The fluctuation start process (step S130a) is executed. In the first fluctuation start process (step S130a), after the setting for starting the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the winning first special symbol lottery (first special determination) and the like, the The 1-processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 1 (step S140a). As a result, if the first process flag is 1 (YES in step S140a), the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) is executed. In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the variation pattern of the first special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 (first special symbol (identification on the first special symbol display 1185) After the variation time from the start of variable display of (pattern) to the stop display) is determined, the first processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 2 (step S160a). As a result, if the first process flag is 2 (YES in step S160a), the first changing process (step S170a) is executed. In this first variation process, the variation time set in the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) is monitored by a timer, and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is based on the time-out. Stop the variable display. Then, after this, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the first variation start process (step S130a), the interlocking flag for interlocking the game on the second special symbol side with the game on the first special symbol side After turning on, the first processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the big hit game. However, when the winning is not won (miss), the first processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the first variation start process (step S130a).

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first processing flag is 3 (step S180a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180a), the first big hit game start processing (step S190a) for creating an interval period before starting the big hit game is executed. When the interval period before the big hit game is started, the first processing flag is updated to "4" in the first big hit game start processing.

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a executes the first jackpot game start processing (step S200a). In the first big hit game start process, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is activated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the first processing flag is updated to "4".

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the first processing flag is 4, and executes the first jackpot gaming process (step S200a). In the first big hit game process, the big hit game mode (round number, open time, maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set big hit game mode. .. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the first variation start process (step S130a).

Thus, in the process of step S100a, if the interlocking flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side is in a state of being interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is in the off state, When any of the processing of S130a, step S150a, step S170a, step S190a, and step S200a is selectively executed based on the state of the first processing flag, the first special control processing in the interrupt processing is Will be terminated.

Hereinafter, the first variation start process (step S130a), the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the first variation process (step S170a), the first jackpot game start process (step S190a), the first jackpot game process ( The detailed procedure of each process of step S200a) and the first interlocking setting process (step S250a) will be described separately.

[First fluctuation start processing]
First, the first variation start process will be described based on FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variation start process of this embodiment. The first variation start process is executed when the first process flag is “0” in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines, as the process of step S301a, whether or not there is a lottery process for the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. I do. Then, when it is determined that there is no lottery process for the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter (YES in step S301a), within the interrupt process. The first fluctuation start process is once ended. That is, in this case, each time the above-described interrupt process is performed, in the process of step S301a, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery process for the first special symbol in the suspended state, and the suspended state. Until it is determined that there is a lottery process for the first special symbol, the progress of the game on the first special symbol side will be substantially in a standby state.

On the other hand, the main control MPU4100a, in the process of step S301a, when it is determined that there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in the suspended state (NO in step S301a), then in step S302a As a process, it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0. The number of STs is the number of times of lottery processing (the number of times the special symbol changes) that makes the winning probability of the big hit a high probability (probability change state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in the first big hit game processing (FIG. 131) described later. .. In the present embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after all the big hit games are finished. The details of the types of jackpots will be described later with reference to FIG. 146.

If the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S302a), the main control MPU 4100a updates the ST count by 1 as the process of step S303a. On the other hand, if the ST count is 0 (YES in step S302a), the process of step S303a is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S304a.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a, as the process of step S304a, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM4100e of the main control MPU4100a (eg, the first winning) A random number group stored in the first storage area of the determination random number, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, the first variation random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S305a, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage region of the first special symbol reserved storage region of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (first winning determination random number) , 1st symbol random number, 1st reach random number, 1st fluctuation random number) it does the shift operation in the mode of first-in first-out (First-In First-Out).

More specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Then, thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the first special pending number counter as the processing of steps S306a and S307a, and based on the read first random number for winning determination, the lottery processing (the first 1 Special symbol lottery)

Here, in the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146(A), when the jackpot winning probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the jackpot is won. When the probability state is the probability change state (high probability state), the jackpot is set to be won with a probability of 1/45.

Then, when the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) is performed in this manner, the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308a. To do. At this time, a stop symbol is also determined according to the result of the first special symbol lottery. After that, as the process of step S309a, when the first process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), this process is terminated.

The result of the first special symbol lottery obtained in the first variation start process is the peripheral control by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the winning information command set in the process of step S308a. It will be transmitted to the unit 4140.

[First variation pattern setting process]
Next, the first variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) and the like will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variation pattern setting process of this embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) executed when the first process flag is “1”, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 wins the big hit. If the flag indicating that is set (YES in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the big hit depending on the game state is selected (step S402a), and the flag state indicating that the win is not won for the big hit is made. If there is (NO in step S401a), the variation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S403a).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a), and the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command which notifies the peripheral control board 4010 to start is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 is started (step S405a). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the first variation timer (step S406a). As a result, the fluctuation control is performed on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 only for the fluctuation time thus determined. After that, as the process of step S407a, when the first process flag is updated to "2" so that the process shifts to the process during the first fluctuation (step S170a), this process is ended.

The variation pattern set in the first variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S405a. To be done. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed on the basis of the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140. Display effect will be performed.

In addition, among the variation pattern tables used in the processing of steps S402a and S403a, the variation pattern table used in the normal game state (normal mode) and the high-precision short time gaming state (rush preparation mode) has a liquid crystal display. A plurality of variation patterns (variation time) for enlivening the display effect in the device 1900 are stored. These fluctuation patterns are set with effects (including reach effects) that make the degree of expectation of "winning" different, and any fluctuation pattern is selectively determined in the process of step S405a. Becomes On the other hand, in the variation pattern table used when in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the reduced variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. Details of setting the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Processing during first fluctuation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first changing process (step S170a) executed when the first process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the first changing process according to this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines, as the process of step S501a, whether or not the first variation timer set in the process of step S406a in the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) has reached 0, that is, the above setting. Judgment is made as to whether or not the specified fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the first fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501a), the first fluctuation process (step S170a) is performed. Each time it is performed, the first fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521a.

As a result of such processing, when it is determined that the first fluctuation timer has become 0 in the processing of step S501a, that is, the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501a). ), the main control MPU4100a, as the processing of step S502a and step S503a, the stop symbol that has already been determined (stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery) is displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185. By performing the display control for ending the variable display by doing the above, the liquid crystal display device 1900 the first fixed stop command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol. It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The first confirmation stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the same display effect is definitely displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

After performing the process related to the symbol stop in this way, this process will be terminated when various processes according to the result of the first special symbol lottery are executed.

The main control MPU4100a, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504a), in order to avoid the occurrence of duplicate hits on the second special symbol side, the second special symbol side The interlocking flag of the above-mentioned second special symbol indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game on the side of the first special symbol is turned on (step S505a). Further, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability variation state) is turned off (step S506a). Then, after this, in order to start the big hit game, when the first processing flag is updated to "3" (step S507a), this processing is ended.

By doing such a control, until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is turned off (the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later) Step S726a), the game on the second special symbol side will be stopped in conjunction with the game on the first special symbol side regardless of the second processing flag, or the current state will be maintained.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost (NO in step S504a), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in the on state. It is determined (step S511a). The probability variation flag is set to the ON state when the jackpot winning probability shifts from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probability variation state). Since the change in the winning probability of the big hit is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

Then, when the probability variation flag is in the ON state (YES in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of STs is 0 (step S512a). When the number of STs is 0 (YES in step S512a), it is determined that the probability variation state has ended, and the probability variation flag is set to the off state (step S513a).

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is in the off state (NO in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514a. Further, even if the probability variation flag is in the ON state, if the ST number is not 0 (NO in step S512a), the probability variation state continues, so that the probability variation flag is maintained in the ON state and the process proceeds to step S514a. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the processing of step S514a (step S514a). Specifically, it is determined whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. The time saving flag is set to the ON state when the time saving function is activated in the time saving function setting process (step S725a) of the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S514a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S515a). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is given together with the probability changing function upon the occurrence of the first big hit A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability variation flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued to operate when the probability variation flag is in the on state.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time saving function when the probability variation flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513a described above and the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S516a). Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this manner, the special symbol is variably stopped so as to indicate that it is a loss, and the first processing flag is set to "at the processing stage where the special symbol is reserved and consumed." 0" (step S517a), and this processing ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the first special symbol will be performed.

[First big hit game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the first jackpot game start processing (step S190a) executed when the first processing flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of the first big hit game start processing of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (first big hit start interval timer) for measuring the pre-start interval of the big hit game is already set as the process of step S601a. As a result, if the first big hit start interval timer is not set yet (NO in step S601a), the condition device is operated as the process of step S602a, and the time saving is performed as the processes of step S603a and step S604a. If the function is operating (YES in step S603a), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations have been completed, in order to start the pre-start interval of the big hit game, as the processing of steps S605a and S606a, the first big hit start interval timer is set and the first big hit interval start command is set. , This process is once ended.

The first big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606a is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

That is, after the first jackpot start interval timer is set in this manner, it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S601a each time the interrupt processing is performed ( (YES in step S601a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611a, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. It will be judged whether or not it is done. In the process of step S611a, as long as it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611a). ), each time the first big hit game start process (step S190a) is performed, the first big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621a.

Then, as a result of such processing, it is determined in the processing of step S611a that the first big hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. When (YES in step S611a), the main control MPU 4100a updates the first processing flag to "4" to execute the big hit game (step S612a), and ends this processing.

Regarding the first big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the kind of big hit symbol (the type determined by the first symbol random number).

[First big hit game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the first jackpot game process (step S200a) executed when the first process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the first jackpot game process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first jackpot game execution flag, which indicates that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress, is on, as the process of step S701a. The first big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to an on state by the process of step S703a described later at the start of the first big hit game, and is turned off by the process of step S723a described later at the end. Is set.

When the first big hit game execution flag is not on (NO in step S701a), the main control MPU 4100a starts the control of executing the big hit game using the attacker device 2100, in step S702a. As, the opening mode (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round) is set according to the type of jackpot. The details of the opening mode according to the type of jackpot will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the execution mode of the big hit game is set in this way, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of steps S703a and S704a, indicates that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress. When the flag is turned on and the first big hit start command is set, this process is once ended.

That is, after the first big hit game execution flag is turned on in this manner, it is determined that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt process is performed ( If YES in step S701a), the main control MPU 4100a will determine whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted, as the process of the next step S711a. Then, in the processing of this step S711a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been exhausted yet, that is, it is in the middle stage of the control related to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S711a). ), each time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712a. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) of the opening/closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712a. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the kind of big hit comes to be realized.

When it is determined in the process of step S711a that the set number of rounds has been exhausted while the control is being performed, that is, it is determined that the control for executing the jackpot game has been completed. (YES in step S711a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721a, step S722a, step S731a, step S741a, step S742a) for generating the end interval of the big hit game.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (first big hit end interval timer) for measuring the end interval of the big hit game has been set (step S721a). As a result, if the first big hit end interval timer is not set yet (NO in step S721a), the first big hit end interval is set as the processing of steps S741a and S742a so as to start the end interval of the big hit game. When the timer is set and the first big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

The first big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742a is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the big hit game ending interval appears through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 to be described later.

That is, after the first jackpot end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S721a each time the interrupt processing is performed ( (YES in step S721a), the main control MPU4100a, as the process of the next step S722a, whether or not the first big hit end interval timer is 0, that is, the time set as the end interval of the big hit game has elapsed. It will be judged whether or not it is done. In the process of step S722a, as long as it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S722a). ), each time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the first big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731a.

When it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer has become 0 in the processing of step S722a, that is, the time set as the jackpot end interval has elapsed, as a result of performing such processing. (YES in step S722a), the main control MPU 4100a will perform each process (step S723a to step S728a) for ending the big hit game.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates, as the process of step S723a, the first jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress. Then, as the process of step S724a, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability variation state) is operated to the on state, and the number of times of special symbol lottery is set to the high probability state ( Set ST times to 70 times. The probability variation flag that has been operated to the ON state here is operated to the OFF state when the ST number has been exhausted (step S513a) or when a big hit has occurred before the exhaustion (step S506a).

In the present embodiment, the probability variation function is activated for all big hits, but when the probability variation function is activated or not depending on the type of big hit, the time saving function setting process described later (step S725a). As described above, first, the process of determining whether or not the jackpot that activates the probability changing function is a big hit may be executed. Then, in the case of a big hit that activates the probability variation function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability variation flag in the ON state as in the process of step S724a described above, and sets the number of STs. Further, in the case of a big hit that activates the probability changing function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only operates the probability changing flag to the ON state and does not have to set the ST number.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a, as step S725a, executes a time saving function setting process for setting whether or not to operate the time saving function according to the type of big hit and the gaming state. The details of the time saving function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, after the processing relating to the probability variation function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a, the second special symbol side, in view of the possibility that the big hit game will occur in duplicate on the second special symbol side, The above-mentioned interlocking flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol is turned off (step S726a). Then, after this, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727a), and the first processing flag is updated to "0" because it is in the processing stage in which the first special symbol that has become the big hit this time has been held and consumed (step S728a). ), and ends this processing. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the first special symbol will be performed.

According to such a big-hit game process, until the round game is judged to have reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 711a, the corresponding special winning opening 2103 is opened according to the type of the big hit ( With the step S712a), the player is repeatedly opened, and the player can obtain the prize ball according to the type of the big hit.

[Time-saving function setting process]
Next, the time saving function setting process (step S725a) of the above-described first big hit game process (FIG. 131) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving function setting process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the big hit this time is a big hit that activates the time saving function, depending on the type of big hit (step S751). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (C) described later, the time saving function is provided only when the big hit of the symbol A (first big hit A) is won in the first special symbol lottery.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (step S752) when it is a big hit to activate the time saving function (YES in step S751). The rush mode in the present embodiment indicates a gaming state in which the probability changing function operates and the time saving function does not operate (high accuracy non-time saving game status). Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is off.

When the current game mode is not the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving game state) (NO in step S752), the main control MPU 4100a operates the time saving flag to activate the time saving function (step S753). .. After that, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit this time is not the big hit that activates the time saving function (NO in step S751), the main control MPU 4100a ends the process without operating the time saving flag. In addition, even if the big hit this time is a big hit that activates the time saving function and the current game mode is the rush mode (high accuracy non-time saving game state) (YES in step S752), the time saving flag is not operated. This process ends. Here, the time saving flag is set to an off state when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the first big hit game start processing (FIG. 130) described above.

Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving game state), the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function. It will not operate. In the present embodiment, a gaming state (rush mode) which is advantageous to the player is provided rather than a gaming state (rush preparation mode) in which the time saving function is activated by not operating the time saving function which is generally advantageous to the player. It is characterized by

[First interlocking setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a) of the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the first interlocking setting process of this embodiment.

In the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the game on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is controlled so as to be linked to the game on the second special symbol side.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a).

When the first special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a has already been determined in the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined lost symbol (step S1002a).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set lost symbol on the first special symbol display device 1185 (step S1003a). Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 sets a first fixed stop command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004a). .. Note that the processing of these steps S1003a and S1004a is the same as the processing of steps S502a and S503a that are performed when the variation time is up in the above-described first variation processing (FIG. 129).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs the same processing as the processing of steps S511a to S517a executed when the first special symbol is lost in the above-described first variation processing (FIG. 129) by the processing of steps S1005a to S1011a. After the execution, this process ends.

On the other hand, the main control MPU4100a, when the first special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001a), continues the state of the current first special symbol (that is, the state where the first special symbol is not changing). Then (step S1021a), this processing ends.

In this way, in the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived by the change of the second special symbol (when the first interlocking flag is in the ON state), the changing first special symbol is forced. Stop with a lost design. Further, the first special symbol which is not changing is put in a standby state in which the change is not started until the first interlocking flag is turned off. In this way, it is avoided that the hit overlaps between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol.

In the present embodiment, in the process of step S505b of the second changing process (FIG. 137), the first interlocking flag is set to ON at the timing when the changing time of the second special symbol ends, and in the first interlocking setting process. Although the stop symbol already determined in the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is changed to the deviating symbol, the invention is not limited to this. The first interlocking flag may be set to ON at the timing when the variation starts depending on the gaming state. For example, in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), when the big hit or the small hit is derived in the hit determination process (step S307b) of the second variation start process (FIG. 135), the first interlocking flag is turned on. Try to set it. When the winning determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is performed during the variation in which the second big hit is derived, the first winning determination random number is not used and the lottery is performed without a lottery. You may make it determine an off symbol. As a result, the variation of the first special symbol that is executed during the variation of the second special symbol from which the big hit is derived is determined as the deviation symbol at the start of the variation, so that the process at the variation end timing of the second special symbol is simplified. can do.

Further, as a modified example of the first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment, a standby state in which the changed state is maintained even when the first special symbol is changing may be created. In this way, if the big hit is derived due to fluctuations on the side of the first special symbol, it will be forcibly controlled to lose, and the player will lose the chance to win the first big hit, which he or she originally should have won. Disappear.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 142, each detailed procedure of the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled will be described.

The second special symbol control process may be performed by using the same program as the above-described first special symbol control process and changing various values referred to in the program.

[Second special symbol control processing]
The second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing on the second special symbol side of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the interlocking flag on the second special symbol side is in the on state (step S100b). The interlocking flag of the second special symbol is a flag that is set to an ON state when the game on the second special symbol side is in a state of being interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side can be advanced at the same time. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur between the first special symbol side game and the second special symbol side game, so avoid this. In order to do so, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in the game on one side, at that time, the interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on. ing. Here, the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the first special symbol lottery in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) is a big hit (step S505a).

When the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S100b), the main control MPU 4100a does not perform any process (steps S130b to S240b) according to the second process flag. , The second interlocking setting process is executed (step S250b). The details of the second interlocking setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

On the other hand, the main control MPU4100a, in the process of the step S100b, when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is in the OFF state (NO in step S100b), the original game of the second special symbol side As the game situation where the progress of is allowed, the state of the second processing flag showing the progress situation of the game on the second special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU4100a, among the plurality of processing shown in the figure (step S130b ~ step S240b), the processing that matches the state of the second processing flag confirmed in this way (the progress status of the game on the second special symbol side) By selectively executing, the game on the second special symbol side will be properly advanced.

More specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second processing flag is 0 (step S120b), and if the second processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120b), the 2 The fluctuation start process (step S130b) is executed. In the second variation start process (step S130b), after the setting for starting the variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the winning second special symbol lottery (second special determination), etc., The second processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120b), it is determined whether the second processing flag is 1 (step S140b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140b), the second variation pattern setting processing (step S150b) is executed. In this second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the variation pattern of the second special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the second special symbol display device 1186 (the second special symbol (identification on the second special symbol display device 1186) After the variation time from the start of variable display of (pattern) to the stop display is determined), the second processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second processing flag is 2 (step S160b). As a result, if the second process flag is 2 (YES in step S160b), the second changing process (step S170b) is executed. In this second variation process, the variation time set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) is monitored by the timer, and the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 based on the time-out. Stop the variable display. Then, after this, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the second variation start process (step S130b), the interlocking flag for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side with the game on the second special symbol side After turning on, the second processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the big hit game. In addition, when it is determined that you have won the small hit, similarly, the small hit game is started after the interlocking lag for linking the first special symbol side game to the second special symbol side game is turned on. In order to do so, the second processing flag is updated to “5”. However, if the small hit and the big hit are not won (miss), the second processing flag is updated to "0". As a result, the current fluctuation ends, so the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second processing flag is 3 (step S180b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180b), the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) is executed. In this second big hit game start process, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is activated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to "4".

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second processing flag is 4 (step S200b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200b), the second big hit game processing (step S210b) is executed. In the second big hit game process, the big hit game mode (number of rounds, opening time, maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set big hit game mode. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the second processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. As a result, the current fluctuation ends, so the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the second processing flag is 5 (step S220b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220b), the second small hit game start processing (step S230b) for creating an interval period before starting the small hit game is executed. In addition, when the interval period before starting the small hit game has elapsed, the second processing flag is updated to "6" in the second small hit game start processing.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S220b), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the second processing flag is 6, and executes the second small hit game processing (step S240b). In the second small hitting game process, a small hitting game in which the opening/closing member 2106 is opened/closed in a control mode according to the type of small hitting is performed. When the small hit game is over, the second processing flag is updated to "0". As a result, the current fluctuation ends, so the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt processing.

Thus, in the process of step S100b, if the interlocking flag indicating that the game on the second special symbol side is in the state of being interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side is in the off state, When any of the processes of S130b, Step S150b, Step S170b, Step S190b, Step S210b, Step S230b, and Step S240b is selectively executed based on the state of the second processing flag, in the interrupt processing. The second special control process is ended.

Hereinafter, the second variation start process (step S130b), the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the second variation process (step S170b), the second jackpot game start process (step S190b), the second jackpot game process ( For each process of step S210b), the second small hit game start process (step S230b), the second small hit game process (step S240b), and the second interlocking setting process (step S250b), detailed procedures thereof are separately classified. Each will be explained.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
First, the second variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the second variation start process of this embodiment. The second variation start process is executed when the second process flag is “0” in the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

The main control MPU 4100a first determines, as the process of step S301b, whether or not there is a lottery process for the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value of the second special hold number counter. Then, when it is determined that there is no lottery process for the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the second special hold number counter (YES in step S301b), within the interrupt process. The second fluctuation start process is once ended. That is, in this case, each time the above-described interrupt process is performed, in the process of step S301b, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery process for the second special symbol in the suspended state, and the suspended state. Until it is determined that there is a lottery process for the second special symbol, the progress of the game on the second special symbol side will be substantially in a standby state.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S301b that there is a lottery process for the second special symbol in the suspended state (NO in step S301b), then in step S302b. As a process, it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0. The number of STs is the number of times of lottery processing (the number of times the special symbol changes) that makes the winning probability of the big hit a high probability (probability change state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in the second big hit game processing (FIG. 139) described later. .. In the present embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after all the big hit games are finished. The details of the types of jackpots will be described later with reference to FIG. 146.

Then, when the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S302b), the main control MPU 4100a updates the ST count by 1 as the process of step S303b. On the other hand, if the ST count is 0 (YES in step S302b), the process of step S303b is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S304b.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a, as the process of step S304b, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM4100e of the main control MPU4100a (for example, the second winning symbol). A random number group stored in the first storage area of the determination random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S305b, a random number group (second winning/deciding random number for random selection process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a) , 2nd symbol random number, 2nd reach random number, 2nd fluctuation random number) in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

More specifically, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. In this embodiment, only the first area (digested area) of the second special symbol reserved storage area is valid. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol of the present embodiment, unless the second special symbol corresponding to the previously generated starting prize has finished changing, the random number extracted according to the starting prize generated later is stored. It will not be done.

Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the second special pending number counter as the processing of steps S306b and S307b, and based on the read second random number for win/loss determination, the lottery processing (the first 2 Special symbol lottery)

Here, in the second special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146(A), when the winning probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the winning probability state is changed. In the case of the state (high probability state), it is set to win the big hit with a probability of 1/45. Also, if the winning probability state is the normal state, the small hit is won with a probability of 390/399, and if the winning probability state is the probability changing state (high probability state), the small hit is won with a probability of 44/45. It is set.

Then, when the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery and the winning information command, respectively, as the process of step S308b. To do. At this time, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery is also determined. Then, after that, as the process of step S309b, when the second process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), this process ends.

The result of the second special symbol lottery obtained in the second variation start process is the peripheral control by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the winning information command set in the process of step S308b. It will be transmitted to the unit 4140.

[Second fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the second variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the second variation pattern setting process of this embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is executed when the second process flag is "1" in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described above.

The main control MPU4100a, if the flag indicating that the big hit has been set (YES in step S401b), selects the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit according to the gaming state (step S402b), and wins the small hit. If the flag indicating that it has been set is set (YES in step S403b), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit according to the game state is selected (step S404b), and it is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In the case of the flag state indicating that (NO in step S403b), the variation pattern table at the time of losing is selected (step S405b).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the second variation random number read in step S304b in the second variation start process (step S406b), and the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 to start is set and the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 1186 is started (step S407b). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the second variation timer (step S408b). As a result, the fluctuation control is performed in the second special symbol display device 1186 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 only for the fluctuation time thus determined. Then, after that, as the process of step S409b, when the second process flag is updated to "2" so that the process shifts to the second changing process (step S170b), this process ends.

The variation pattern set in the second variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S407b. To be done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery (small win lottery) is obtained through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 based on the variation pattern shown by the effect command and the information shown by the winning information command. The display effect is performed as shown by.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side are simultaneously advanced, in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the display effect on the first special symbol side (variation of the decorative symbol etc.) and the display effect on the second special symbol side (variation of the decorative symbol etc.) appear at the same time. ..

Of the variation pattern tables used in the processing of steps S402b, S404b, and S405b, the variation pattern table used when in the normal game state (normal mode) and the high-precision short time gaming state (rush preparation mode) is: A variation time (for example, 600 seconds) that is 10 times or more longer than any other variation time that can be selected on the first special symbol side is always selected. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table used when in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the reduced variation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. Note that details of setting the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Processing during second fluctuation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the second changing process (step S170b) executed when the second process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the second changing process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second fluctuation timer set in the process of step S408b in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150b) has reached 0 as the process of step S501b, that is, the above setting. Judgment is made as to whether or not the specified fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the second fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, the fluctuation time that has been set has not elapsed (NO in step S501b), the second fluctuation process (step S170b) is performed. Each time it is performed, the second variation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521b.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S501b, when it is determined that the second fluctuation timer has become 0, that is, the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501b). ), the main control MPU4100a, as the processing of step S502b and step S503b, the stop symbol that has already been determined (stop symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery) is displayed on the second special symbol display device 1186. By performing display control for terminating the variable display by doing the above, a second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design of the second special design is provided. It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The second definite stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the same display effect is definitely displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

After performing the process related to the symbol stop in this way, at the time when various processes according to the result of the second special symbol lottery are executed, this process is ended.

The main control MPU4100a, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504b), in order to avoid the occurrence of duplicate hits on the first special symbol side, the first special symbol side The interlocking flag of the above-mentioned first special symbol indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game on the side of the second special symbol is turned on (step S505b). Further, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability variation state) is turned off (step S506b). Then, after this, when the second processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the big hit game (step S507b), this processing is ended.

On the other hand, the main control MPU4100a, similarly when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit (NO in step S504b, and YES in step S531b), first, the winning overlaps on the first special symbol side. In order to avoid the occurrence, the interlocking flag of the above-mentioned first special symbol indicating that the game on the first special symbol side is in a state to be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is turned on (step S532b). ). Then, after that, when the second processing flag is updated to "5" in order to start the small hit game (step S533b), this processing is ended.

By performing such control, until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is turned off (the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later) Step S726b), the game on the side of the first special symbol will be stopped in conjunction with the game on the side of the second special symbol regardless of the first processing flag, or the current state will be maintained.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost (NO in step S504b and NO in step S531b), the main control MPU 4100a first turns on the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100. Or not (step S511b). The probability variation flag is set to the ON state when the jackpot winning probability shifts from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probability variation state). Since the change in the winning probability of the big hit is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game in the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later.

Then, when the probability variation flag is in the ON state (YES in step S511b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of STs is 0 (step S512b). When the number of STs is 0 (YES in step S512b), it is determined that the probability variation state has ended, and the probability variation flag is set to the off state (step S513b).

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is in the off state (NO in step S511b), main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S514b. Further, even if the probability variation flag is in the ON state, if the ST number is not 0 (NO in step S512b), the probability variation state continues, so that the probability variation flag is maintained in the ON state and the process proceeds to step S514b. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the processing of step S514b (step S514b). Specifically, it is determined whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. The time saving flag is set to the ON state when activating the time saving function in the time saving function setting processing (step S725b) of the second big hit game processing (FIG. 139) described later.

Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S514b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S515b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is given together with the probability changing function upon the occurrence of the first big hit A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability variation flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued to operate when the probability variation flag is in the on state.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a, when the probability variation flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513b described above, determines that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied and stops the time saving function (step S516b). Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped to change so that it is shown as a loss, and the second processing flag is set to "at the processing stage where the special symbol is reserved and consumed". 0" (step S517b), and this processing ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the second special symbol will be performed.

[Second big hit game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the second jackpot game start processing (step S190b) executed when the second processing flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the second jackpot game start processing of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a timer (second big hit start interval timer) for measuring the pre-start interval of the big hit game is set as the process of step S601b. As a result, if the second big hit start interval timer is not set yet (NO in step S601b), the condition device is operated as the process of step S602b, and the time saving is performed as the processes of step S603b and step S604b. If the function is operating (YES in step S603b), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations are completed, in order to start the pre-start interval of the big hit game, as the processing of steps S605b and S606b, the second big hit start interval timer is set and the second big hit interval start command is set. The process is once ended.

The second big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606b is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

That is, after the second jackpot start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second jackpot start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S601b each time the interrupt processing is performed ( (YES in step S601b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611b, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. It will be judged whether or not it is done. In the process of step S611b, as long as it is determined that the second jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S611b). ), each time the second big hit game start process (step S190b) is performed, the second big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621b.

Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S611b, it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. At this time (YES in step S611b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing when the second processing flag is updated to "4" to execute the big hit game (step S612b).

Regarding the second big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the kind of big hit symbol (the type determined by the second symbol random number).

[Second jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the second jackpot game process (step S200b) executed when the second process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the second jackpot game process of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second big hit game execution flag, which indicates that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress, is on in the process of step S701b. The second jackpot game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to the on state by the process of step S703b described later at the start of the second jackpot game, and is turned off by the process of step S723b described later at the end. Is set.

If the second big hit game execution flag is not on (NO in step S701b), the main control MPU 4100a starts the control of executing the big hit game using the attacker device 2100 in step S702b. As, the opening mode (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round) is set according to the type of jackpot. The details of the opening mode according to the type of jackpot will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the execution mode of the big hit game is set in this way, the main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of steps S703b and S704b, indicates that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress. When the flag is turned on and the second jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

That is, after the second big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt process is performed ( If YES in step S701b), the main control MPU 4100a will determine whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted, as the process of the next step S711b. Then, in the processing of this step S711b, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been exhausted yet, that is, it is in the middle stage of the control relating to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S711b). ), each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712b. As a result, every time the interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 (including the interval between rounds) is updated (managed) through the processing of step S712b. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the kind of big hit comes to be realized.

Then, in the process of the above step S711b, when it is determined that the set number of rounds has been exhausted, that is, all the controls related to the execution of the jackpot game are completed, while such control is being performed. (YES in step S711b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721b, step S722b, step S731b, step S741b, step S742b) for generating the end interval of the big hit game.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (second big hit end interval timer) for measuring the end interval of the big hit game is already set (step S721b). As a result, if the second big hit end interval timer is not set yet (NO in step S721b), the second big hit end interval is set as the processing of steps S741b and S742b so as to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the second big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

The second big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the big hit game ending interval appears through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 to be described later.

That is, after the second jackpot end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S721b each time the interrupt processing is performed ( (YES in step S721b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit end interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S722b, that is, the time set as the end interval of the big hit game has elapsed. It will be determined whether or not. Then, in the process of step S722b, as long as it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S722b). ), each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the second big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731b.

Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S722b, when it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. (YES in step S722b), the main control MPU 4100a will perform each process (steps S723b to S728b) for ending the big hit game.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates, as the process of step S723b, the second big hit game execution flag which indicates that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress. Then, as the process of step S724b, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability variation state) is operated to the on state, and the number of times of special symbol lottery is set to the high probability state ( Set ST times to 70 times. The probability variation flag operated to the ON state here is operated to the OFF state when the ST number is exhausted (step S513b) or when the jackpot is hit before the exhaustion (step S506b).

In the present embodiment, the probability variation function is activated for all big hits, but if the probability variation function is not activated depending on the type of big hit, the time saving function setting process described later (step S725b). As described above, first, the process of determining whether or not the jackpot that activates the probability changing function is a big hit may be executed. Then, in the case of a big hit that activates the probability variation function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability variation flag in the ON state as in the process of step S724b described above, and sets the number of STs. Further, in the case of a big hit that activates the probability changing function until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only operates the probability changing flag to the ON state and does not have to set the ST number.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a, as step S725b, executes a time saving function setting process for setting whether or not to operate the time saving function according to the type of big hit and the gaming state. The time saving function setting process is the same as the time saving function setting process (step S725a) in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described above, and is as described above with reference to FIG. 132.

Then, after the processing related to the probability variation function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a is the first special symbol side in view of the possibility that the big hit game will be duplicated on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol is turned off (step S726b). Then, after this, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727b), and the second processing flag is updated to "0" because it is in the processing stage in which the second special symbol which has become the big hit this time has been reserved and consumed (step S727b). S728b), and this processing ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the second special symbol will be performed.

According to such a big-hit game process, until the round game is judged to have reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 711b, the corresponding special winning opening 2103 is opened according to the type of the big hit ( With the step S712b), the player is repeatedly opened, and the player can obtain the prize ball according to the type of the big hit.

[Second small hit game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the second small hit game start processing (step S230b) executed when the second processing flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the second small hit game start processing of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a timer (second small hit start interval timer) for measuring the pre-start interval of the small hit game is already set as the process of step S801b. As a result, when the second small hitting start interval timer is not set yet (NO in step S801b), the second small hitting start interval timer is started as the processing of steps S802b and S803b to start the pre-starting interval of the small hitting game. When the small hitting start interval timer is set and the second small hitting interval start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

The second small hit interval start command set in the process of step S803b is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the small hitting game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

That is, after the second small hitting start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second small hitting start interval timer has been set each time the interrupt process is performed (YES in step S801b). ), the main control MPU4100a, in the processing of the next step S811b, the second small hit start interval timer is 0, that is, it is determined whether the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hit game has elapsed. Will be done. In the process of step S811b, as long as it is determined that the second small hitting start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hitting game has not elapsed (in step S811b, NO), each time the second small hitting game start process (step S230b) is performed, the second small hitting start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S821b.

Then, as a result of performing such a process, in the process of step S811b, it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hit game has elapsed. When it is done (YES in step S811b), the main control MPU 4100a ends the process when the second process flag is updated to "6" to execute the small hit game (step S812b).

[Second small hit game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the second small hit game process (step S240b) executed when the second process flag is “6” will be described. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of a second small hit game process of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU4100a, first, as the processing of step S901b, it is determined whether or not the second small hit game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress. To do. The second small hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to an on state by the process of step S903b described later at the start of the second small hit game, and is turned off by the process of step S921b described later at the end. Set to state.

When the second small hit game execution flag is not on (NO in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a starts step S902b to start the control for executing the small hit game using the attacker device 2100. As the processing of (1), an opening mode (opening pattern) corresponding to the type of small hit and a control timer for measuring the time required for executing control related to the opening pattern are set. There is only one type of small hit in this embodiment. Details of the small hit opening mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the main control MPU4100a, as the processing of step S903b and step S904b, while turning on the second small hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress , When the second small hit start command is set, this process is once ended.

That is, after the second small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt process is performed. (YES in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the control timer is 0 in the process of the next step S911b, that is, the timing for ending the control for executing the small hit game has come. Will be determined. Then, in the processing of this step S911b, as long as it is determined that the control timer is not 0, that is, it is in the middle stage of the control relating to the execution of the small hit game (NO in step S911b), the second small hit Each time the game process (step S240b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a first executes the opening/closing control of the attacker device 2100 according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S912b. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the opening/closing movement of the opening/closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912b, and the attacker device 2100 is opened/closed. The game will be realized.

Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S911b, if it is determined that the control timer is 0, that is, it is determined that all the controls for executing the small hit game have been completed (step S911b). , YES), the main control MPU4100a performs each process (step S921b ~ step S929b) for ending the small hit game.

Main control MPU4100a, first, as the processing of step S921b, the control which depends on the execution of the small hit game is in the state where it has advanced already, the second small hit game execution flag is operated to OFF state. Next, in consideration of the possibility that the big hit game will be duplicated on the first special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side should be in a state of being linked to the game of the second special symbol. The interlocking flag of the first special symbol shown is turned off (step S922b).

Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in the on state (step S923b). Then, when the probability variation flag is in the ON state (YES in step S923b), it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S924b). If the number of STs is 0 (YES in step S924b), it is determined that the probability variation state has ended, and the probability variation flag is set to the off state (step S925b).

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S923b), main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process of step S926b. Even if the probability variation flag is in the ON state, if the ST number is not 0 (NO in step S924b), the probability variation state continues, so that the probability variation flag is maintained in the ON state and the process proceeds to step S926b. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of step S926b. Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S926b), it is determined whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S927b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is given together with the probability changing function upon the occurrence of the first big hit A, and operates while the probability changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability variation flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued to operate when the probability variation flag is in the on state.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a, when the probability variation flag is set to the off state in the process of step S925b, determines that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied and stops the time saving function (step S928b). Then, after the processing related to the probability changing function and the time saving function is performed in this way, the second processing flag is updated to "0" because it is in the processing stage where the special symbol that has derived the small hit has been reserved and consumed (step S929b). , This process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the second special symbol will be performed.

[Second linked setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b) of the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the second interlocking setting process of this embodiment.

In the second interlocking setting process, when the big hit is derived in the game on the side of the first special symbol, the game on the side of the second special symbol is controlled so as to interlock with the game on the side of the first special symbol.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (step S1001b).

When the second special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a has already been determined in the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) of the second variation start process (FIG. 135). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined lost symbol (step S1002b).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set lost symbol on the second special symbol display device 1186 (step S1003b). Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 sets a second fixed stop command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the second special symbol, as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004b). .. Note that the processing of these steps S1003b and S1004b is the same as the processing of steps S502b and S503b that are performed when the variation time is up in the above-described second variation processing (FIG. 137).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs the same processing as the processing of steps S511b to S517b executed when the second special symbol is lost in the above-described second variation processing (FIG. 137) by the processing of steps S1005b to S1011b. After the execution, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a continues the state of the current second special symbol (that is, the state in which the second special symbol is not changing). Then (step S1021b), the present process ends.

In this way, in the second interlocking setting process, if a big hit is derived in the variation of the first special symbol (when the second interlocking flag is in the on state), the second special symbol in transition is forcibly lost. To stop. In addition, the second special symbol which is not changing is made to the standby state in which the change is not started until the second interlocking flag is turned off. This avoids that the hits overlap between the game on the second special symbol side and the game on the first special symbol side.

[Normal pattern side processing]
Subsequently, the normal control process (step S15) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the normal control process, the normal symbol variation control (ordinary symbol lottery) based on the passage of the game ball of the universal symbol gate 2301 is executed, and a movable piece (ordinary symbol) is generated in the normal symbol lottery when a hit occurs (normal symbol). The winning auxiliary control for activating the electric prize) 2111 to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b is executed.

[Normal control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal control process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the gate sensor 2302 that detects the passage of the game ball to the universal gate 2301 is in the ON state (step S2001). When the gate sensor 2302 detects the passage of the game ball to the universal figure gate 2301 and is in the ON state (YES in step S2001), the main control MPU 4100a, the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol is a random number counter. And the gate passing process such as storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM, etc. (step S2010). The details of the gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

Then, the main control MPU4100a, 5 process processing according to the normal symbol process flag (ordinary symbol normal process, ordinary symbol variation time determination process, ordinary symbol variation process, ordinary symbol stop process, ordinary electric auditors opening process) 1 One of them is selectively executed to end the normal control processing.

First, in the normal design normal process of step S2100, the main control MPU4100a reads the normal random number stored in the RAM4100e of the main control MPU4100a, based on the read normal random number about the display mode when the variable control of the normal design is stopped. Perform lottery processing, etc.

Next, in the normal symbol variation time determination process of step S2200, the main control MPU 4100a performs a lottery process or the like for the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1189 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol variation process of step S2300, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of waiting until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 is stopped.

Next, in the normal symbol stop process of step S2400, the main control MPU4100a, the mode at the time of the normal symbol fluctuation control determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the normal symbol fluctuation control is normal A process for stopping the variable display of the normal symbols as displayed on the symbol display device 1189 is executed.

Next, in the normal electric accessory release process of step S2500, the main control MPU 4100a is movable when the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped indicates the "universal figure". The piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to execute processing for controlling the game ball to be won into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing the data stored in the various registers and the main control internal RAM 4100e.

[Gate passage processing]
Next, the gate passage process (step S2010) of the above-described normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage process of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and the hold number of the normal symbol is a value less than "4" which is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not (step S2011).

Then, the main control MPU4100a, when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is a value less than the maximum value (YES in step S2011), the variable display control of the normal symbol is newly suspended, step S2012. ~ The process of S2014 is executed. First, as the process of step S2012, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S2013, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S2014, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, this gate passage processing is ended.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a does not newly hold the variable display control of the normal symbol when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is the maximum value (NO in step S2011). That is, the gate passage process is ended without executing the processes of steps S2012 to S2014.

[Normal pattern normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) of the above-mentioned normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described. Normal symbol normal process is executed when the normal symbol process flag in the above-mentioned normal control process indicates that this process should be performed. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal design normal processing of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the on-hold state, based on the counter value by the ordinary hold number counter (step S2101). As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state (YES in step S2101), the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a Of the random numbers related to the display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers), the random number stored in the first storage area is read from the RAM (step S2102). Then, while performing a countdown of decrementing the normal holding number counter by 1 (step S2103), it relates to a display mode when the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. A random number (ordinary random number, universal figure fluctuation random number) is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner (step S2104).

Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a stores the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the universal design gate 2301 in order from the first (first) region of the normal symbol reservation storage region having four storage regions. To do. Then, when the game ball passes through the universal figure gate 2301 when the random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current game state is the time saving game state (step S2105). Then, if the current gaming state is a time saving gaming state (YES in step S2105), a universal figure hitting determination table (not shown) for time saving is selected (step S2106), and the current gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state. If so (NO in step S2105), a non-time saving general-purpose figure determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2107). After that, the ordinary drawing hit determination table selected in the process of step S2106 or step S2107 is compared with the ordinary random number read in the process of step S2102 (step S2108).

Note that the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is time saving and is used when the gaming state is non-time saving. It is provided with a general-universal-person hit determination table for non-time saving. Then, in the time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the general-purpose figure determination value indicating that the general-purpose random number has been won. Ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving game state, when the game ball passes through the universal figure gate 2301, the winning is always won per universal figure, and the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to activate the first starting opening 2101. It is controlled so that the game ball can be won into the special winning opening 2101b.

Further, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers may match with the general-university figure determination value indicating that each common figure has been won. Instead, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the general-university-drawing determination value, which indicates that the general-university drawing is out of alignment. In this way, in the non-time saving game state, even if the game ball passes through the universal figure gate 2301, since it is not won per universal figure, through the opening operation of the movable piece (normal electric accessory) 2111. There is no control so that a game ball can be won into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. As described above, the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving game state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving game state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is When it hits, the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is opened for a time shorter than the time saving game state, for example, 0.1 seconds to allow the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2101b, and then the closing operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to disable the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b.

The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it is a universal figure hit as a result of the processing in step S2108 described above (step S2109). Then, in the case of a per-universal figure (YES in step S2109), after setting the per-universal-symbol flag indicating that the variation of the pertinent normal symbol is won per per-universal symbol (step S2110), The per-universal-use symbol is determined as a mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control is stopped (step S2112).

On the other hand, the main control MPU4100a, as a result of the processing in step S2108 described above, if the result is out (NO in step S2109), the normal symbol variation control stop mode (normal symbol stop symbol) The missing pattern is determined (step S2111).

After the processing of step S2112 or step S2111 is completed, the main control MPU 4100a updates the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2200) (step S2113), and this process ends. ..

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state in which the time saving function does not operate is set to 0%, and the probability of winning the ordinary symbol in the time saving game state in which the time saving function operates is set to 100%. However, it is not limited to this. In the time saving game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 becomes higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the playing ball into the regular winning opening 2101a, that is, the time saving game. In the state, it may be a game specification of a normal symbol that can guide the player to right-hand rather than left-handing (probability of winning per universal figure, universal figure variation time, opening pattern of ordinary electric auditors). Specifically, in the time saving game state, compared to the non-time saving game state, the probability of changing the normal figure to increase the probability of winning per general figure, the general figure fluctuation shortening function to shorten the general figure fluctuation time, and the opening operation by ordinary electric auditors At least one function of the universal electric power extension function for extending (winning assistance control) is added. As a result, in the time saving game state, the prize assisting strengthening control, which is a further enhancement of the prize winning assisting control set in the non-time saving game state, is executed.

[Special design game specifications]
FIG. 146 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the present embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 146(A), the winning probability in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(A), in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, when the winning probability is in the normal state (low probability state), the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399. Also, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the winning probability is set higher than in the normal state, the big hit is won with a probability of 1/45. In addition, in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, only the big hit that the condition device operates, the small hit that the condition device does not operate does not occur. In the hit determination process (step S307a) of the above-described first variation start process (FIG. 127), the big hit determination is performed with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 depending on the probability state at the time of executing the lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146(B), the winning probability in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(B), the winning in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment includes a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery. The small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery, if the big hit winning probability is in a normal state (low probability state), wins the small hit with a probability of 390/399, and the big hit winning probability is a probability change state (high probability state) If it is, a small win is won with a probability of 44/45. The small-hit winning probability is a constant probability regardless of the game state, and unlike the big-hit winning probability, does not change between the normal state and the probability changing state. In the hit determination process (step S307b) of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 135), a big hit determination is made with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 depending on the probability state at the time of executing the lottery, 390/399. Alternatively, a small hit determination is made with a winning probability of 44/45.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set to be high. In particular, when the second special symbol lottery in the probability changing state does not win the big hit, it is set to always win the small win. The small hit may not necessarily be won when the big hit is not won. The small hit here may be one that wins with a much higher probability than the probability of being out of the jackpot when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146(C), the jackpot type of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(C), in the big hit of the present embodiment, the first big hit A and the first big hit B that can occur in the first special symbol lottery, and the second big hit that can occur in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of jackpots, A and the second jackpot B, are provided.

The first big hit A occurs with a probability of 75% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, at which time the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol A. In addition, the first big hit B occurs with a probability of 25% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, at which time the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol B.

The second big hit A occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol A. Further, the second jackpot B occurs at a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, at which time the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol B.

These four kinds of big hits, with a probability of 100%, shift the game state after the big hit game to the probability variation state, and continue the probability variation state until the number of times of variation of the special symbol after the big hit game is executed 70 times. It is provided so that a function can be added. Further, the first jackpot A can be provided with a time saving function for performing a prize assist control for activating a movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 to assist the prize winning of a game ball into the special prize winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. It is provided in.

In addition, the manner of opening the special winning opening 2103 is set according to the type of big hit, and the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit A, and the second big hit B are opening patterns A, B, and C, respectively. And D are set. Here, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is changed according to the opening pattern to enhance the interest of the big hit game.

The opening patterns A to C are set so that the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time and the player can obtain a sufficient prize ball. For example, the open pattern A and the open pattern B are big hit games in which a round game is played four times, and the open time and the maximum winning number of each round are set so that the player can obtain 500 balls as a prize ball. In addition, the opening pattern C is a big hit game in which a round game is played 16 times, and the opening time and the maximum winning number of each round are set so that the player can obtain 2000 balls as a prize ball.

On the other hand, the opening pattern D is set such that the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 is short and the player cannot obtain a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern D is a big hit game in which a round game is played 16 times, and is set so that the player cannot substantially obtain a prize ball by repeating high-speed opening with one short opening time.

Next, the small hit type of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 146(D), the small hit of this embodiment is provided with a second small hit C that can occur in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C occurs with a probability of 100% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and at this time, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol C. In addition, the opening pattern E is set in the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E is provided so that one opening time is short and a prize ball can be obtained by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning is not a winning that a player intends to win the big winning opening 2013 by hitting a game ball into the playing area, but a game area in which the big winning opening 2013 is arranged. It is a prize that can be obtained because the game ball that has been hit accidentally flows down a position where a prize can be won when the special winning opening 2013 is opened. In the second small hit C, if the player hits the game ball with a right hit, the number of rounds and one opening time of the big winning opening 2013 can be accidentally expected to win about 1-2 balls. Is set. When about 1 to 2 balls are won in the big winning opening 2013 by the second small hit C, about 15 to 30 balls can be won.

In the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) of the present embodiment, the second small hit C is provided so as to occur frequently, and the player continuously hits the game ball with a right-hand hit to cause the rush mode. It is possible to promote accidental winning based on the second small hit C that occurs in the inside, and the number of award balls that can be acquired is the majority of the number of award balls that can be acquired during the rush mode (total number of acquired balls). Will occupy. In the present embodiment, when the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) of the number of STs (70 times) occurs during the rush mode, the above-mentioned large hit prize balls (2000 balls) or more prize balls (maximum 2100 balls). ) Can be expected, so there will be no decline in the entertainment of the game due to the occurrence of small hits where almost no prize balls can be obtained. Rather, a small hitting game that occurs a plurality of times rather than one big hitting game keeps the player interested in the game, so that the interest of the series of games in the rush mode can be enhanced.

Also, with reference to FIG. 146(E), the variation time of the special symbol of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(E), the variation time of the special symbol of the present embodiment varies depending on the game mode (game state). The variation time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode. Is set. In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode.

Here, the normal mode is a game mode in which the player is encouraged to win a game ball into the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 (that is, "left hitting"), and the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery. Shows a normal game state in which the normal state (low probability state) and the time saving function are not given. The rush preparation mode is a game mode in which the player is encouraged to win a game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 (that is, "right hit"), and the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. Shows a highly accurate time-short game state in which a probability change state (high probability state) and a time-shortening function are added. The rush mode is a game mode in which the player is encouraged to win a game ball into the second starting opening 2102 (that is, “right hit”), and the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a certain change state (high probability). State) and shows a highly accurate non-time saving game state in which the time saving function is not given. The high-probability time short game state in the rush preparation mode is a game state that can be shifted when the above-described first big hit A occurs.

In this way, in the game of the special symbol provided to the player, the above-mentioned specifications (probability of winning, type of winning, variation time, etc.) change according to the game state. Then, the transition from the normal game state to the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is given by the number of given STs (here, 70 times). It is triggered by the completion of the symbol lottery (variation).

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, the transition of the game state and the control of the simultaneous change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each game state will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a transition of the game state (game mode) of this embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is a normal game state (normal mode). In the normal game state, by aiming at a game area 1100 on the left side of the center role object 2500, a game ball is shot (so-called “left hit”), so that the game ball is won in the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101. Is the best playing method for the player.

Here, the second starting opening 2102 of the present embodiment can easily win the prize by only following the downflow path of the game ball that is shot (so-called “right hit”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is provided in. And the 2nd special symbol lottery based on the winning to the 2nd starting opening 2102 has a high winning probability of the small hit which can win a prize ball (390/399 in a normal state, 44/45 in a probability change state). In this case, the player attempts to hit the game ball right from the start of the game and aim to win the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (E) described above, the variation of the second special symbol in the gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 is not recommended. The time is set to a long time variation (600 seconds). As a result, it takes a long time until the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes and stopped (the result of the lottery is known). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting right. ..

Since the second starting opening 2102 of the present embodiment is always open and winning is easy, the second special in the gaming state where the winning is not recommended in order to suppress the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. Although the variable time of the symbol is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member capable of converting the second starting opening 2102 into an easy winning state and a difficult winning state is provided, and in a gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) where it is not recommended to win a game ball into the second starting opening 2102 You may make it set to a difficult state. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid the complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state conversion member and to provide a game that is easy for the player to obtain the point, by changing the variation time according to the game state, We guide you to play in the best way.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a). And, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the normal game state is continued, while if the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit A, a high probability short game state (rush preparation mode, The first advantageous game state). Also, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit B, it shifts to a high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

In the normal game state as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility of finding the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal game state (occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush preparation mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high-probability time shortening gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the player is provided with an advantage that the first big hit A is generated and that the probability variation function and the time-saving function are given together with the prize ball acquisition.

In the high-probability time short game state (rush preparation mode), by launching a game ball (so-called “right hit”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 It is the best game method for the player to win a game ball.

Here, when the right-handed game ball passes through the universal design gate 2301 arranged in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the regular symbol lottery derives the universal symbol winning because the time saving function is activated. It is done (probability per ordinary figure is 100% in the time saving state). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, as described above, in the time saving game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the gaming ball to the regular winning opening 2101a. Since it is set high, the player hits right and aims at the special winning opening 2101b.

Therefore, in the high-probability time short game state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (special winning opening 2101b). Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost 70 times in a row, it shifts to the normal game state (normal mode). Also, if the result of the first big hit A is derived by the time the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST number is reset to 70 times and the main game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state) To continue. If the result of the first big hit B is derived by the time the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state) is entered.

As described above, in the high probability time saving game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the probability of the result of the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability time short game state being found (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high-probability short-time gaming state (rush preparation mode) to the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (rush mode) will be described. At the time of this transition to the state, the player is provided with an advantage that the first big hit B is generated and that the probability variation function is given at the same time as winning the prize ball.

In the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the game ball is shot at the second starting opening 2102 by aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right hitting"). It is the best playing method for the player.

Here, the 2nd starting opening 2102 of this embodiment is provided in the downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the game ball hit to the right reaches the second starting opening 2102 after flowing down the movable area of the movable piece 2111 of the universal figure gate 2301 and the special winning opening 2101b, but the time saving function does not operate, so the universal figure gate Even after passing through 2301, there is no ordinary hit (that is, the special winning opening 2101b is in the easy winning state due to the operation of the movable piece 2111). Therefore, in the high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the game ball hit to the right almost wins the second starting opening 2102.

Therefore, in the high probability non-time saving game state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. The execution of the first special symbol lottery is limited to the first special symbol lottery that was put on hold in the game state before the transition when the game state transitions. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in this game state is a result that is not a big hit in succession 70 times, it shifts to the normal game state (normal mode). In addition, if the result of one of the big hits is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST number is reset to 70 times and the main game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state) is set. continue.

In the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability non-time saving game state, if the big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, the small hit is always derived. Then, in the small hit game that occurs at this time, the player can obtain a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as a prize ball, which is less than the number of game balls that can be obtained in the big hit game. Therefore, if the game state is reached, the player can obtain a prize ball by the small hit game every time the second special symbol lottery is executed until the next big hit. And, in this game state, a maximum of 70 small hit games can continuously occur. That is, a series of games of the second special symbol until the next big hit occurs becomes a privilege game in which a prize ball can be obtained.

The variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the high-probability non-time saving game state are both set to a short time (1 second). In this game state, since it is recommended to execute the second special symbol lottery, the variable time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds) so that it takes time until the result of the first special symbol lottery is known. It is also possible to do. However, in the present embodiment, the period for which the probability variation function is applied is controlled by the number of executions of special symbols (number of STs), and the number of STs is counted at the start of variation of the special symbols. Therefore, when the variation time of the first special symbol that is the subject of the probability variation function becomes long, the first special symbol is provided with the probability variation function, but the second special symbol is not provided with the probability variation function. Can occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to the same short time as the second special symbol, the probability state is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous variation state. It prevents the occurrence (obscuring the end of the probability change state). As a modification, when controlling the end of the period of giving the probability variation function until the next big hit occurs, the variation time of the first special symbol in this game state may be set to a long time. In the present embodiment, since it is possible to forcibly stop the other special symbol lottery during the simultaneous fluctuation when one special symbol lottery derives a big hit, it is unclear the end of the probability variation state as described above. It does not occur.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) can obtain a prize ball in a series of second special symbol small hit games even if a big hit is not derived, and the total number of prize balls. Is more than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game that occurs in the same mode. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high-probability time-shortening gaming state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous gaming state) but the high-probability non-time-shortening gaming state (rush mode, second advantageous gaming state).

The high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) is a game state that can occur when the first jackpot B is derived in the first special symbol lottery, so the player first has the normal game state (normal mode) or high. In the certainty short time game state (rush preparation mode), a game aiming to win a game ball to the first starting opening 2101 is performed. Then, when the game state shifts to the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) with the occurrence of the first jackpot B, the player next plays a game aiming at winning a game ball into the second starting opening 2102. To do.

[Control timing chart of each game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game on the side of the first special symbol (first special symbol) and the game on the side of the second special symbol (second special symbol) can be changed simultaneously. However, the big hit game and the small hit game using the attacker device 2100 cannot be duplicated in both games. Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, the timing of the simultaneous variation control in each gaming state will be described.

(Simultaneous fluctuation control timing chart)
FIG. 148 is an example of a timing chart explaining the simultaneous variation control of the present embodiment. 148(A) is an example of the interlocking stop control of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and FIG. 148(B) is the first interlocking setting process in the rush mode (FIG. 133). ) Is an example of interlocking stop control.

As shown in FIG. 148(A), in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high-probability time short game state), when the game ball wins the second starting opening 2102, the variation of the second special symbol. The time (second fluctuation time) is set to 600 seconds, and the long time fluctuation is started to be executed. When the game ball wins the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a or special winning opening 2101b), the variation time of the first special symbol (first variation time) is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds, and the winning order is the first. Variation of 1 special symbol is executed.

In the game of the first special symbol side, when the big hit is derived, the fluctuation is stopped by the stop symbol of the first big hit (step S502a), and the game of the second special symbol side is linked to the first special symbol side. The interlocking flag (second interlocking flag) to be turned on is set to the on state (step S505a). Then, the first big hit game is executed (steps S190a and S200a).

Then, in the game on the second special symbol side, the second interlocking flag is turned on, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed, and the second special symbol that is changing It is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop pattern that is off (step S1003b).

Here, the second interlocking flag is a big hit game or a small hit that the attacker device 2100 is similarly used on the second special symbol side when the first big hit game using the attacker device 2100 on the first special symbol side is executed. It is a flag that is provided to prevent the game from being executed, and is also a flag that is necessary to prepare for the rush mode entry.

Specifically, in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high accuracy short time game state), when the first big hit B occurs, the game state after the end of the first big hit game is the rush mode (high Probably untimely game state). In the rush mode after the transition, the game on the second special symbol side based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 becomes the mainstream. At this time, if the variation of the second special symbol started before the transition is continued, the game on the side of the second special symbol waits for the variation and becomes a standby state. Therefore, the second interlocking flag is a flag necessary to start the game in the rush mode without delay.

As shown in FIG. 148(B), immediately after shifting to the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving game state), the variation of the first special symbol that was held in the game state before the shift is executed. The variation time of the first special symbol at this time is set to a short time (1 second). And in the rush mode, the game of the 2nd special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2102 is the mainstream. The second starting opening 2102 is a winning opening that can be won by right-handing even for a beginner in the game. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1 second, the variation of the second special symbol occurs frequently. In addition, the second special symbol which does not derive the big hit derives the small hit.

Therefore, in the game on the second special symbol side, the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the small hit game (second small hit game) are alternately repeated until the next big hit occurs. Then, every time the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S502b), the interlocking flag (first interlocking flag) for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side with the second special symbol side is set to the ON state. (Step S532b). Then, the second small hit game is executed (steps S230b and S240b), and when the second small hit game is completed, the first interlocking flag is returned to the off state (step S922b).

In the game on the first special symbol side, the first interlocking flag is turned on, and the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed. At this time, the first special symbol that has not started to change is put in a standby state so as not to start changing (step S1021a), and starts to change when the first interlocking flag is turned off (step S130a). Further, the changing first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a stop symbol which is off (step S1003a).

In this way, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in which the game on the first special symbol side becomes mainstream, the frequency of execution of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) is high, and the game on the second special symbol side becomes mainstream. Then, the execution frequency of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) is high. In the present embodiment, there is a concern that the winning game may occur between the first special symbol side game and the second special symbol side game, so to avoid this, one side game When the hit is obtained in, the game on the other side is controlled by the interlocking setting process at that time.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 149 is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment.

When the player starts playing the game, first, the normal mode is started. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to hit left and aim at the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101. Here, the launching force of the game ball at the start of striking is too strong and becomes right-handed, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the variation time of the second special symbol (second variation time) is long. Long-term fluctuations are carried out.

After that, when the player adjusts the launching force and hits left, and when the game ball wins the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the fluctuation pattern selected. In the game of the first special symbol side, the first special symbol lottery to win the big hit with a probability of 1/399 is executed. When the first big hit A is won, the variation is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol A and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, the variation of the second special symbol in the long-term variation state is forcibly discontinued and displayed as a symbol. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode.

In the rush preparation mode, it is best for the player to hit right and aim at the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a probability changing function of 70 times of ST and a time saving function for performing winning award assistance control for facilitating winning of the special winning opening 2101b are provided.

When the player hits right and the game ball wins the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the variation of the first special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the fluctuation pattern selected. In the game on the first special symbol side, the first special symbol lottery to win the big hit with a probability of 1/45 is executed. Then, the ST number is updated by subtracting 1 at the start of variation of the first special symbol. Then, if the first big hit B is won when the count of the number of STs is 68, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol B and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, but the state is maintained because the change of the second special symbol is not executed. Then, with the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode.

In rush mode, it is best for the player to hit right and aim at the second starting opening 2102. Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not added, but only the probability changing function with the ST number of 70 times is added. Here, the number of STs whose count value was 68 at the end of the rush preparation mode is counted again from the count value of 70.

Here, the player continues to hit the right. The game ball hit to the right does not enter the special winning opening 2101b because the time saving function does not operate, and wins the second starting opening 2102 below. Since it is easy for even a beginner to enter the game to win the second starting opening 2102, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 occurs frequently. The variation time of the second special symbol at this time (second variation time) is set to 1 second, so that the variation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

In the game on the second special symbol side, a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45, and if the big hit is not won, a second special symbol lottery for winning the small hit is executed. Then, the ST number is updated by subtracting 1 when the second special symbol starts changing. As a result of the second special symbol lottery, if a small hit, the variation is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol C and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, the first interlocking flag is set to the ON state while the second small hit game is executed.

In addition, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b that occurred in the rush preparation mode before the transition is in the hold state, and the fluctuation of these first special symbols Will be executed.

In the game on the first special symbol side, the first special symbol lottery to win the big hit with a probability of 1/45 is executed. The variation time of the first special symbol at this time (first variation time) is set to 1 second. In the rush mode, since the small hit game frequently occurs in the game on the second special symbol side, the first interlocking flag is also frequently set to the ON state. Therefore, when the first special symbol is changing when the second special symbol is stopped changing, it is forcibly displayed as a stop symbol. Then, since the first interlocking flag is returned to the off state with the end of the second small hit game, the next variation of the first special symbol is started. Then, the ST number is updated by subtracting 1 even when the first special symbol starts changing.

In this way, immediately after the rush mode starts, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are efficiently executed in a short time, so the subtraction speed of the ST number is also fast. Then, until the count value of the ST number becomes 0, or until the next big hit is won, the variation of the second special symbol and the second small hit game are alternately repeated.

In the rush mode of the present embodiment, when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit is won, so the second small hit game frequently occurs. The number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode is 2,100 when the number of prize balls in one second small hit game is 30, and when the number of ST (70 times) small hits is won. This is more than the maximum number of prize balls (2000 balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game of this embodiment. Therefore, the series of second small hit games in the rush mode can be a bonus game comparable to the big hit game. In addition, since there is a possibility of a big hit game with a probability of 1/45 even in the rush mode, the rush mode is the most advantageous (targeted) game mode for the player.

It should be noted that the ST number in the rush mode is more likely to be beneficial to the player if it is exhausted by the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is preferable that the first special symbol in the suspended state is not carried over to the rush mode. Therefore, when the transition to the rush mode is found, that is, when it is found that the first big hit B is won in the game mode before the transition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 is suppressed. Various controls may be performed. For example, the operation of the movable piece 2111 may be controlled so that the operation of the time saving function for assisting the winning of the special winning opening 2101b is stopped or the winning assist function is lowered. Further, some notification effect may be performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[Control of peripheral control board]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151.

[Sub main processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-main processing of this embodiment. The sub-main process is a process executed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs an initialization process (step S3001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. Then, when the initial setting process ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to "1" is started (step S3002).

Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has passed, 16 ms has passed. While the flag T is set, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0".

When the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to "1" (YES in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag T to "0" (step S3003) and then performs the 16 ms steady process. It executes (step S3004). In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps/LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100.

When the peripheral control MPU 4140a finishes the 16 ms steady process, the process returns to the process of step S3002 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the peripheral control MPU 4140a repeatedly executes the processes of steps S3003 to S3004.

On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set to "1" (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") (NO in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a waits until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set. Executes loop processing.

[16ms steady process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the 16 ms steady process (step S3004) executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process (FIG. 150) described above will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 16 ms steady process of this embodiment.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first executes a command analysis process for analyzing the command received from the main control board 4100 (step S3101). Next, the effect control process for controlling the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the control command (the received variation pattern command or the like) analyzed in the command analysis process (step S3102).

The peripheral control MPU 4140a also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 (step S3103). Next, a lamp control process for controlling the effect of the lamp/LED provided on the pachinko machine 1 is executed (step S3104). Also, output information for executing the effect such as a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp drive substrate 3041 and a process of transmitting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units to the motor drive substrate 3045. The information output process is executed (step S3105). After that, the random number update process for updating the random number used for various settings is executed in the effect control process of step S3102 (step S3106), and the 16 ms steady process is ended.

It should be noted that the 16 ms steady process normally ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a executes the 16 ms steady process from the beginning (the process of step S3101) when 16 ms has elapsed from the start of the process. There is no such thing. That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub main process (step S3002), and the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub main process after the end of the 16 ms steady process. When it is determined that (YES in step S3002), the next 16 ms steady process is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the random number update process (step S3106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. is not. For example, the random number may be updated by one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the sub-main processing (FIG. 150) described above.

(Effect of this embodiment)
According to this embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, the special winning opening 2101b) and the winning based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. It has a control structure that can change 2 special symbols at the same time, and the prize-winning area (always prize-winning opening 2101a, special prize-winning opening 2101b, second starting opening 2102) and the operation of the game ball that the player should aim according to the game state. A plurality of game states are provided so that (right-handed (second game state) and left-handed (first game state)) are different. In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided with a game state display 1183 including an LED that can clearly inform the player of the timing of "right hitting" (second game state), Also, it is possible to smoothly switch the hitting method (driving operation) in accordance with the transition of the game state without mistakenly making a “left hit” and a “right hit”.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits a control signal for controlling the game status indicator 1183 to the peripheral control section 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, so that the player is allowed to "right hit" in the liquid crystal display device 1900. You may notify. Normally, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in the front view of the player (the tip of the front line of sight). Therefore, when "right hitting" is notified on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (striking operation) without shifting the line of sight to the left end portion (function display unit 1180) in front view. It will be possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of game states include a normal game state (normal mode), a highly accurate short time gaming state (rush preparation mode) and a highly accurate non-time short game state (rush mode). Then, in the rush mode, every time the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102, which is easy for the game beginner to win, is performed, an opportunity to win the prize ball (small hit game or Big hit game) is given. Further, in the rush mode, the number of game balls obtainable by the player tends to be higher in the ratio of the number of game balls obtainable in the small hit game than in the ratio of the game balls obtainable in the big hit game. As a result, a series of small hit games in the rush mode can be expected to be able to give more game balls than the big hit game, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the small hit game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the rush mode of the highly accurate non-time saving game state (second advantageous game state) is a highly accurate time saving game state (rush preparation for activating the time saving function generally advantageous to the player. Mode, the first advantageous game state) is a game state that is more advantageous to the player. When the current game mode is the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving game state), the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function. Control to continue rush mode without activation. Since it is possible to provide a game that overturns the existing concept that the player is more advantageous when the time saving function is activated (provided), it is possible to provide a small hit game of the present embodiment, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (the regular winning opening 2101a, the special winning opening 2101b) and the winning of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 2102. When the second special symbol based on it is changed at the same time, when one hit (big hit, small hit) is derived, the other one being changed is forcibly displayed as a stop symbol. Thereby, while avoiding that the hit overlaps between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol, when the game state shifts to another gaming state triggered by the big hit, before and after the shift In addition, it is possible to prevent the variation of the other from being performed across.

(Second embodiment)
The pachinko machine 1 of the present invention is, as described above, the first special symbol and the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b). It has a control structure that can simultaneously change the second special symbol based on the winning of. In such a simultaneous variable control, in order to avoid that a specific game (small hit game, large hit game) is duplicated between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol. Control is required. In the above-described first embodiment, when one special symbol stops changing with a stop symbol indicating a specific result (small hit, big hit), if the other special symbol is changing, the stop symbol is replaced with a falling symbol. By controlling so that the other special symbol does not fluctuate during a specific game, a control structure capable of fluctuating simultaneously is formed.

In the second embodiment, various control patterns of the control structure that can be simultaneously varied will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 186.

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The members having the same functions as those of the game board 4 (see FIG. 114) of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Here, a characteristic configuration of the game board 4 of the second embodiment will be described.

In the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment, a universal figure gate 2301, a second starting opening 2102, a special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, and a special winning opening 2103 are arranged in order from the upstream. ing.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right passage 2545 first reaches the universal figure gate 2301. Then, when the game ball passes through the universal symbol gate 2301, a normal symbol lottery is executed. Further, a second starting port 2102 is arranged below the universal figure gate 2301. The second starting opening is provided so as to be able to receive a game ball that has passed through the general-purpose gate 2301 and a game ball that has not passed therethrough. When the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102, the second special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

A special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is arranged immediately below the second starting opening 2102. The special winning opening 2101b is provided with a pair of movable members (normal electric accessory) 2111 that opens in an inverted "C" shape at the upper part and converts the game ball into a state in which it is easy to receive the game ball (easy to receive). The pair of movable members 2111 normally holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with a gap of about the diameter of the game ball. The special winning opening 2101b is provided with the second starting opening 2102 above, so that the game ball cannot be received when the movable member 2111 is closed. The movable member 2111 is converted from the closed state to the easy-to-accept state when the normal symbol lottery is won, whereby the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b is allowed. When the game ball is received in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the first special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

In addition, below the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are triggered by the opening operation, and at the time of operation, the game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 can be accepted. An attacker device 2100 is provided. The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is a so-called combia-tacker device that opens the special winning opening 2103 by opening and closing two opening/closing members (first opening/closing member 2106a and second opening/closing member 2106b) that slide in the front-rear direction. Details of the attacker device 2100 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is arranged on the lower left portion of the front surface of the front component member 1110 and outside the outer rail 1111. In the first embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided with an LED capable of clearly informing the timing of performing "right hitting" (second gaming state) on the gaming state indicator 1183, but in the present embodiment, the gaming state display A right-handed state indicator 1192 is provided separately from the instrument 1183. Details of the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, a 7-segment display 1920 is provided in the upper right part of the center accessory 2500 and in the upper right part of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The 7-segment display 1920 is display-controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920, respectively, depending on the game state. Details of the 7-segment display 1920 will be described later with reference to FIG.

As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment and the game board 4 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 114) are different in configuration as described above, but their game characteristics (recommended game mode transition) , And the recommended driving operation in the game mode) is the same.

Next, the configurations of the attacker device 2100, the function display unit 1180, and the 7-segment display 1920 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Attacker device]
FIG. 153(A) is a simplified structural diagram of the attacker device 2100 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment.

The attacker device 2100 has a special winning opening 2103, a first opening/closing member 2106a and a second opening/closing member 2106b operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 for driving the opening/closing members of the second opening/closing member 2101 (FIG. 118). See)). The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is characterized in that two opening/closing members (first opening/closing member 2106a and second opening/closing member 2106b) are provided for one big winning opening 2103.

The first opening/closing member 2106a and the second opening/closing member 2106b normally maintain a closed state in which the special winning opening 2103 is closed so that a game ball cannot be received in the special winning opening 2103. It is configured as a part of a guide flow path 2110 that guides the game ball flowing down the right game area to the game area below the center accessory 2500.

Then, when a hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, after the variable display related to the lottery ends, the drive control of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 is performed, and the first opening/closing member 2106a and the second opening/closing member The slide opening/closing operation of the member 2106b in the front-rear direction is performed. The opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing member 2106a and the second opening/closing member 2106b are controlled at the same timing.

Here, the first opening/closing member 2106a and the second opening/closing member 2106b are arranged in parallel on the upstream side and the downstream side of the guide flow path 2110 with a space therebetween. That is, the special winning opening 2103 has two openings capable of receiving the game ball when it is in the open state. The special winning opening 2103 is configured to merge inside regardless of which opening receives the game ball, and the acceptance of the game ball is detected by one count sensor 2122a.

As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is configured to open the special winning opening 2103 by opening the large winning opening 2103 by the two openings of the first opening/closing member 2106a on the upstream side and the second opening/closing member 2106b on the downstream side. It is provided with a combia-tucker structure that allows a plurality of game balls that roll in the guide flow path 2110 from the upstream side to the downstream side when opened once into the special winning opening 2103.

[Function display unit]
FIG. 153(B) is an enlarged front view of the function display unit 1180 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

The function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is provided with a right-handed state indicator 1192 above the display unit 1181 and made up of two LEDs for notifying that it is time to perform “right-handed”. Below the right-handed state indicator 1192, four LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win”. And a first special symbol memory display 1184 which is arranged below the round display 1190 and which is arranged below the round display 1190 and which has two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101. And, the first special symbol is the lottery result (first special lottery result) of the first special symbol which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and is selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101. A first special symbol display device 1185 consisting of eight LED groups for displaying is provided. Further, below the first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol memory display 1187 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102, and the second For displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol, which is arranged on the left side of the special symbol memory display 1187 and is selected by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2102, as the second special symbol. A second special symbol display device 1186 consisting of eight LED groups is provided.

Also, below the display unit 1181, a game state indicator 1183 made up of two LEDs for displaying the game state, and a normal symbol made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to passage of the universal figure gate 2301. A memory display device 1188 and a normal symbol display device 1189 composed of two LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result selected as a normal symbol by a game ball passing through the public figure gate 2301 are provided side by side. There is.

The right hitting state indicator 1192 of the present embodiment lights up the LED at the timing of performing the "right hitting" (second game state) to notify the player of the "right hitting". The LED is turned off at the timing of performing "left hitting" (first gaming state).

In the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball to the universal figure gate 2301 caused by the "right hit" is detected at the timing of performing the "left hit", the signal for warning the player is a main control board. 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 displays a message to warn the liquid crystal display device 1900 to return to the left-hand side and sounds an alarm sound for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). If "right hitting" is detected even after that, it is characterized by performing a penalty control that imposes a predetermined penalty that is disadvantageous to the player.

[7-segment display]
FIG. 153(C) is an enlarged front view of the 7-segment display 1920 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010.

The 7-segment display 1920 displays the variable display (lottery process) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and information on the number of holdings. On the 7-segment display 1920, a first special symbol display portion 1921 including a 7-segment LED for displaying the variable display of the first special symbol (lottery result), and for displaying the number of reserved first special symbols First special symbol storage display unit 1922 consisting of two LEDs, a fourth symbol display unit 1923 consisting of one LED for displaying the fourth symbol relating to the variable display of the first special symbol, and variation of the second special symbol. A second special symbol display section 1924 consisting of a 7-segment LED for displaying the display (lottery result), and a second special symbol storage display section 1925 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the reserved number of the second special symbol. The fourth symbol display unit 1926 including one LED for displaying the fourth symbol relating to the variable display of the second special symbol is provided.

The 7-segment LED that configures the first special symbol display portion 1921 and the second special symbol display portion 1924 represents that variable display is being performed by sequentially repeating lighting and extinguishing (that is, blinking) of each segment, and according to the result, predetermined The change result (lottery result) is displayed by lighting the segment. During the standby, the same segment as when the lottery result is off is lit.

The two LEDs constituting the first special symbol memory display unit 1922 are turned off when the number of holdings is “0”, the upper LED is turned on when the number of holdings is “1”, and the lower LED is turned off, When the number of reservations is "2", both LEDs are lit, when the number of reservations is "3", the upper LED is blinking, the lower LED is lit, and when the number of reservations is "4", both LEDs are Flashes.

The two LEDs constituting the second special symbol memory display unit 1925 are turned off when the number of holdings is “0”, the upper LED is turned on when the number of holdings is “1”, and the lower LED is turned off, Both LEDs turn on when the number of reservations is "2". In this embodiment, it is possible to store "1" pieces of the second special symbol hold.

One LED constituting the fourth symbol display portion 1923, 1926 is capable of emitting red and green instead of monochromatic light. During variable display, lighting and extinction are repeated in red, and when the result of variation is out of range, green is emitted. It lights up and lights up in red when the fluctuation result is a big hit (big hit, small hit).

Then, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the highly accurate short gaming state (rush preparation mode), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920. In addition, when the gaming state is a high-precision non-time saving game state (rush mode), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. To be done.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the display device on which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed is switched according to the game state. The transition to the gaming state is triggered by the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being a big hit, or the termination of the number of STs provided. When the big hit is an opportunity, after the big hit game is over, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the 7-segment display 1920 switch the special symbol to be displayed. When the ST number of times ends, when the ST final change ends and the probability change flag is set to OFF (step S513a in FIG. 129, step S513b in FIG. 137), the liquid crystal display devices 1900 and 7 are used. The special symbol to be displayed by the segment display device 1920 is switched.

[Special design game specifications]
Subsequently, FIG. 154 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the above-described first embodiment will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 154(A) and 154(B), in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation state is 1/51 in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In addition, the small hit winning probability is always 1/3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 154(C), there are four types of big hits and there is no change, but the presence or absence of the time saving function differs depending on the winning gaming state. In this embodiment, a time saving function is provided for big hits other than the big hit B of the first special symbol. Therefore, in order to enter the rush mode, there is no choice but to use the big hit B of the first special symbol as an opportunity. Further, as shown in the time saving function setting process (FIG. 132) described above, the time saving function is not given to the big hit that occurs in the rush mode.

As shown in FIG. 154(D), the number of types of small hits increases in this embodiment. In the small hit of this embodiment, in addition to the second small hit C that can occur in the second special symbol lottery, the second small hit D is provided. The second small hit C and the second small hit D are different in the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) and is opened only once, whereas the opening pattern F has a shorter opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds). ) It is opened twice. When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, the second small hit C or the second small hit D occurs with a probability of 50%.

It should be noted that in the open patterns E and F, the open pattern F can be expected to win the special winning opening 2103. As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is provided with the special winning opening 2103 that can receive the game ball by opening at two places, the upstream and the downstream of the guide flow path 2110 through which the game ball flows down. Even if the opening time is short, the opening pattern F, which is opened twice, has a higher expectation of winning the game ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154(E), in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the variation time of the second special symbol varies depending on the variation result. The variation time when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a win is a shortening variation of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and the variation time when it is out is a long time variation of 600 seconds. Further, when the game mode is the rush mode, the variation time of the first special symbol is a shortening variation having a width of 1 second to 30 seconds.

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a transition of the game state (game mode) of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the transition of the game state (FIG. 147) in the above-described first embodiment will be described.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rush preparation mode can be shifted by the occurrence of the first big hit A (FIG. 146), but in the present embodiment, the first big hit A, the second big hit A, and the second big hit A in the normal mode. It is possible to shift when the two big hits B (FIG. 154) occur. Then, the transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode is due to the transition to the normal mode due to the variation in the number of STs or the transition to the rush mode due to the occurrence of the first big hit B. Further, the transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode (normal mode) is due to the fluctuation of the ST number. In rush mode, no matter what big hit happens, the mode doesn't shift.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode derives a win (small hit, big hit), the change time becomes a shortened change of 1 second. Originally, the game mode for promoting the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 is the rush mode, but in this case, there is a high possibility that the winning to the second starting opening 2102 is aimed at in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol lottery derives the deviation, it is set to a long time variation (600 seconds), or even if the game ball is launched toward the attacker device 2100 after the small hit result is confirmed, it is small. The second in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode by setting the opening timing so as not to be in time for the opening of the special winning opening 2103 in the winning game or making it difficult to guess the opening pattern by providing a plurality of opening modes. Suppress the execution efficiency of special symbol lottery.

In the present embodiment, the game in the rush preparation mode in which the winning to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, that is, "right hitting" is recommended, is diversified. In the first embodiment, since the variation of the second special symbol is long even if the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2102 by "right-handed", the interest can be found only in the variation of the first special symbol. There wasn't. However, in the present embodiment, the variation of the second special symbol in the rush preparation mode is short when deriving the hit result, and the short-term variation occurs with a probability of 1/3 or more. Then, if a big hit result is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, a new ST number is given and the time saving function is continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to find an interest in the variation of the second special symbol, and the game property in the rush preparation mode is improved.

[Control pattern]
Next, referring to FIG. 156, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a, the special winning opening 2101b) and the winning of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 2102 The outline of the control pattern in the control structure capable of simultaneously changing the second special symbol based on will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the control pattern of the simultaneous fluctuation control structure. Hereinafter, an outline of four control patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 156(A) to (D).

First, FIG. 156(A) is a timing chart showing a basic control pattern. As described in the first embodiment, the basic control pattern is to force the one special symbol to be a winning result and to replace the other special symbol being changed with the deviation result to stop the variation. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 156(A), when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped by the small hit stop symbol, the changing first special symbol is a predetermined deviant stop symbol of the determined big hit symbol. Replacing, the variable stop with a deviation stop design.

Described specifically along with the control process of the first embodiment, in the second changing process (FIG. 137) related to the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is timed up, and it fluctuates with the small hit stop symbol. When is stopped, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (YES in step S501b→NO in step S502b→step S503b→NO in step S504b→YES in step S531b→S532b). As a result, in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) related to the first special symbol, the first interlocking setting process is executed regardless of the progress of the variation of the first special symbol (YES in step S100a→ Step S250a).

Then, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the changing first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a predetermined off symbol (YES in step S1001a→step S1002a→step S1003a). Here, the process of determining whether or not the first special symbol is a hit (hit determination process) is the step of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) that is executed when the first special symbol is varied. It is executed in S307a, the stop symbol of the first special symbol has been determined with the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133 ), the determined stop symbol (here, the jackpot symbol) is replaced with a predetermined off symbol.

In this way, in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, the interlocking flag that links the game on the other special symbol side to the one special symbol side is turned on at the timing when one special symbol that derives the hit stops fluctuating. Set to state. For this reason, the other special symbol that occurs during the change of one special symbol, the result of being forced out by the interlocking stop control, it is impossible to determine the presence or absence of the interlocking stop control at the start of variation (Lottery process) had to be executed.

In the second embodiment, as another control of the basic control pattern of the first embodiment, the interlocking flag is set to the ON state at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the variation starts to change, and the other special symbol is the interlocking flag at the start of the variation. If is on, an example will be described in which the hit determination process is not executed (no lottery) and the variation symbol is set to stop changing.

The details of the control process of the basic control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 166.

Next, FIG. 156(B) is a timing chart showing a priority control pattern. The priority control pattern is to preferentially execute a special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player by comparing the results derived by both special symbols, and to stop the other special symbol from fluctuating with a falling symbol.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156(B), when a variation for deriving a small hit with the second special symbol is executed, if a variation for deriving a big jackpot with the first special symbol occurs, both lottery As a result of the comparison of the results, the first special symbol for deriving a jackpot which is advantageous for the player fluctuates and stops at the jackpot symbol. Then, the second special symbol replaces the determined small hit stop symbol with a predetermined disengagement stopper symbol, and variably stops at the disengagement stopper symbol.

In this way, in the priority control pattern, the special symbol to be prioritized is determined among the special symbols that are simultaneously changed according to the lottery result derived from the special symbol, that is, the special symbol to derive a more advantageous result for the player is given priority. Can be executed. In the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, even if the special symbol that has been a big hit in the hit determination at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol that is the other small hit fluctuates first and is forced to fall off. It has been set, but you will not inadvertently miss such a special design that becomes a big hit. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original game playability of the gaming machine than the basic control pattern.

The details of the control process of the priority control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 175.

Next, FIG. 156(C) is a timing chart showing an interruption control pattern. The interruption control pattern, while the hit game is being performed by the hit result derived from one special symbol, the other special symbol is interrupted, and after the hit game is over, the other special symbol restarts the fluctuation of the remaining time. Is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156(C), when a variation that derives a small hit with the second special symbol is executed and a variation that derives a big hit with the first special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is a small hit. When the symbol stops changing, the first special symbol suspends temporary fluctuation. Then, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. Meanwhile, the first special symbol suspends the fluctuation. When the small hit game ends, the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation.

In this way, in the interruption control pattern, the first special symbol and the second special symbol that have occurred can be changed and executed as a result based on the obtained random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the special symbols that fluctuates at the same time was forcibly set to be off regardless of the acquired random number, but in the interruption control pattern, the result of the special symbol that the player acquired ( The hit determination result based on random numbers will not be overridden. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original game playability of the gaming machine more than the priority control pattern described above. Moreover, since it is possible to make the hit game by the first special symbol and the second special symbol appear to be related by the effect in the fluctuation at the time of restart, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The details of the control processing of the interruption control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 to 181.

Next, FIG. 156(D) is a timing chart showing a reset control pattern. The reset control pattern is for resetting the remaining variation time when the other special symbol that has been interrupted is restarted, based on the above interrupt control pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156(D), when a variation that derives a small hit with the second special symbol is executed and a variation that derives a big hit with the first special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is a small hit. When the symbol stops changing, the first special symbol suspends temporary fluctuation. Then, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. Meanwhile, the first special symbol suspends the fluctuation. Up to this point, the control is the same as the lottery control pattern described above. In the reset control pattern, when the small hit game is over and the first special symbol restarts the suspended fluctuation, the fluctuation time is newly set after restarting the fluctuation.

In this way, in the reset control pattern, the degree of freedom in the effect in the change at the time of restart is increased more than in the above-described interruption control pattern, so that the interest of the game can be further enhanced. Further, by setting the variable time at the time of resumption according to the game situation, it is possible to provide a recommended game.

The details of the control process of the reset control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 to 186.

<Basic control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processing will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the basic control pattern of the second embodiment, at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the hit starts to change, the forced off flag of the other special symbol is set to the ON state, and the other special symbol has the forced off flag at the start of the change. If it is in the ON state, it is characterized by a control structure in which the hit determination process is not executed (no lottery) and the variation is stopped by the deviating symbol.

[First fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the first variation start process (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S306a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol that sets the first special symbol to be deviated in the non-lottery is on. (Step S311a). Then, when the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S311a), the processes of steps S307a and S308a for performing the lottery of the first special symbol and setting the lottery result information are executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308a described above indicates the winning result (step S313a). Then, if it is a flag indicating the hit result (YES in step S313a), the forced removal flag of the second special symbol for making the variation result of the second special symbol that occurs during the variation of the first special symbol a detachment result. Is turned on (step S314a). On the other hand, if it is not the hit result flag, that is, if it is the miss result flag (NO in step S313a), the process proceeds to step S309a without executing the process of step S314a.

On the other hand, the main control MPU4100a, when the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S311a), sets a flag indicating the disengagement result of the first special symbol and a dislocation information command (step S312a). Then, the process proceeds to step S309a.

In this way, in the first fluctuation start process, when the first special symbol derives the hit result, by setting the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol to the ON state, it occurs after the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts. The second special symbol to be set is set to derive the deviation result in the non-lottery.

[First big hit game processing]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the first jackpot game process (FIG. 131) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag and the compulsory disengagement flag of the second special symbol to the off state when the first big hit game is over (step S751a).

[First interlocking setting process]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a), the first off symbol determined in the process of step S312a of the above-described first variation start process (FIG. 157) It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101a). Then, the process proceeds to step S1004a.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second variation start process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the second variation start process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S306b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol that sets the second special symbol to be deviated by non-lottery is on. (Step S311b). Then, when the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S311b), the process of steps S307b and S308b for performing the lottery of the second special symbol and setting the lottery result information is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308b described above indicates the winning result (step S313b). And, if it is a flag indicating the hit result (YES in step S313b), the forced removal flag of the first special symbol for making the variation result of the first special symbol that occurs during the variation of the second special symbol a detachment result. Is turned on (step S314b). On the other hand, if the flag is not the hit result, that is, the flag is the deviating result (NO in step S313b), the process proceeds to step S309b without executing the process of step S314b.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, when the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S311b), sets the flag indicating the dissociation result of the second special symbol and the dissociation information command (step S312b). Then, the process proceeds to step S309b.

In this way, in the second variation start process, the second special symbol occurs after the variation start of the second special symbol by setting the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol to the ON state when deriving the hit result. The first special symbol to be set is set to derive the deviation result in the non-lottery.

[Second jackpot game processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common with the 2nd big hit game process (FIG. 139) of 1st Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag and the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second big hit game is over (step S751b).

[Second small hit game processing]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second small hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the second small hitting game process (FIG. 141) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag and the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second small hit game is over (step S951b).

[Second linked setting process]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the second special symbol is changing (step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is the second off symbol which has been determined in the process of step S312b of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 160). It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101b). Then, the process proceeds to step S1004b.

[Right-handed penalty setting processing]
Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of right-handed penalty setting processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty setting process is a process executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 with respect to the warning and the penalty provision for the “right-handed” at the timing of performing the “left-handed”.

In this process, when "right hit" is performed in the game state where "left hit" is recommended, first a warning is given, and if "right hit" is performed after the warning, a penalty is imposed. Is set.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state) (step S1201). Then, when the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S1201), it is determined whether "right hit" has been detected (step S1202). Here, the detection of "right hitting" means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the universal figure gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It should be noted that the detection of acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 may be performed.

The main control MPU 4100a ends this processing if the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S1201) or if the right-hand hit is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S1202). To do.

Then, when the "right hit" is detected (YES in step S1202), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the warning has been executed (step S1203). The warning is to notify the player to return to "left-handed". Whether or not the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking whether or not a warning executed flag, which is set when a warning timer, which will be described later, times out.

When the warning has not been executed (NO in step S1203), the main control MPU 4100a sets a time (warning timer) for issuing the warning (step S1204). Then, when the warning timer times out (YES in step S1205), the warning execution completion flag is set to the ON state (step S1206), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the warning has already been executed (YES in step S1203), the main control MPU 4100a determines that “right-handed” is continuing despite the warning, and thus imposes a penalty for a predetermined period.

The main control MPU 4100a first sets a penalty timer, which is a period to impose a penalty (step S1211), and sets the forced off flag of the second special symbol to the on state (step S1212). Then, until the penalty timer times out (NO in step S1213), the forced off flag of the second special symbol is turned on.

When the penalty timer times out (YES in step S1213), the main control MPU 4100a sets the forced off flag and the warning executed flag of the second special symbol to the off state (step S1214), and ends this processing.

As described above, when "right hit" is detected in the normal mode in which "left hit" is recommended, the player is first warned to return to "left hit". Then, if the "right hit" is still continued, even if the "right hit" is performed and the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 occurs, a penalty period is given as a deviation result in the non-lottery. Then, since the player is informed (indicated) that the penalty has been imposed (see FIG. 166), the player can be guided to perform an appropriate driving operation according to the game mode.

Next, a characteristic process of the control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The liquid crystal display process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (high accuracy non-time saving state) (step S3201). Then, when the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, when it is the normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state) or the rush preparation mode (high-probability time saving state) (NO in step S3201), the main control MPU 4100a causes the second It is determined whether or not the variation of winning that derives the winning result is executed on the special symbol side (step S3202). Then, when the hit variation is executed on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (step S3203). On the other hand, when the hit variation is not executed on the second special symbol side (NO in step S3202), normal display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3204).

Here, the blackout refers to a display effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is dark and noisy. The blackout is started when the special symbol which is the variable display target on the 7-segment display 1920 starts the variation for deriving the winning result, and is continued until the winning symbol is determined by the variation. The special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 is due to the winning of the game ball into the starting opening which is not recommended to the player in the game mode. Therefore, the blackout can be said to be a hit announcement effect informing that a hit variation due to a special symbol not recommended in the game mode has occurred.

[Right-handed penalty notification processing]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of right-handed penalty notification processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty notification process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the warning and the penalty notification for the "right-handed" at the timing of performing the "left-handed". Is one. Further, it is an effect process corresponding to the right-handed penalty setting process (FIG. 164) executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state) (step S3301). Then, when the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S3301), it is determined whether "right hit" is detected (step S3302). Here, the detection of "right hitting" means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the universal figure gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It should be noted that the detection of acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 may be performed.

Peripheral control MPU4140a, if the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S3301) or if there is no detection of "right hit" even in the normal mode (NO in step S3302), this processing ends To do.

Then, when the “right hit” is detected (YES in step S3302), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the warning has been executed (step S3303). Whether or not the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking the state of the warning executed flag set on the main control MPU 4100a side.

If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the time for issuing the warning (warning timer) (step S3304). The warning timer may acquire the timer information from the main control MPU 4100a side described above. Then, a warning notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a message "Please return to left-handed" (step S3305). At this time, the warning sound may be emitted for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the warning may be suggested. Until the warning timer times out (NO in step S3306), a warning is issued (step S3305), and when the warning timer times out (YES in step S3306), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the warning has already been executed (YES in step S3303), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the "right-handed stroke" is continuing despite the warning, so the main control MPU 4100a determines the predetermined value. A period penalty is imposed.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the penalty timer (step S3311). Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes a penalty notification for notifying that a penalty has been imposed (step S3312). The penalty notification is continued until the penalty timer times out, and when the penalty timer times out (YES in step S3313), this processing ends.

<Effects of basic control pattern>
Thus, according to the basic control pattern of the present embodiment, the presence or absence of the interlocking stop control is determined at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the variation starts to change, so that the other special symbol that is started afterwards is a variation start. Without executing the determination process (without lottery), it is possible to stop the variation with the outlier symbol. Even if the hit determination process is executed, useless processing can be omitted in the other special symbol for which a deviation result is forcibly set, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Priority control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processing will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the priority control pattern, the first special symbol is compared with the result derived by the second special symbol to preferentially execute the special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player, and the other special symbol is changed to a control that stops in a deviating symbol. Characterized by structure.

[First fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation start process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the first variation start process (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

After performing the process of step S307a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current variation of the first special symbol is a variation advantageous to the player as compared with the variation of the second special symbol. A first priority determination process for determination is executed (step S321a). Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 168.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308a and ends this process.

[First priority determination processing]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first priority determination processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The first priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321a of the first variation start process (FIG. 167) described above.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (step S361a). Then, when there is no changing second special symbol (NO in step SS361a), this process ends because there is no comparison target.

Main control MPU4100a, when there is a changing second special symbol (YES in step S361a), acquires the result of the hit determination process of the changing second special symbol (step S362a), and the above-mentioned first. The result is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307a of the variation start process (FIG. 167) (step S363a).

When the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player (YES in step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second special symbol is a disengagement result (step S365a). Then, if the result is a deviation (YES in step S365a), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result is not out of sync, that is, if it is a small hit or a big hit result (NO in step S365a), the forced off flag which forcibly disengages the second special symbol is set to the on state (step S366a). ), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player (NO in step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol to be off (step S367a). ), and this processing ends.

Thus, in the first priority determination process, if there is a changing second special symbol when the variation is started with the first special symbol, it is determined which variation result is advantageous to the player, If the first special symbol is advantageous, the second special symbol is dissociated, and if the first special symbol is not advantageous, the first special symbol is dissociated, so that the first special symbol and the second are changed simultaneously. Avoid hit games with special symbols.

[Processing during first fluctuation]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first changing process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the first changing process (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the variable time of the first special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501a, and then determines whether the forced off flag of the first special symbol is in the ON state. (Step S551a). The forced off flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

Then, the main control MPU4100a, when the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S551a), the stop symbol of the first special symbol is replaced with the disengagement, and the forced disengagement flag is turned off. It is set (step S552a).

After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502a on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the 1st special symbol which is changing is replaced by the deviation result by the 2nd special symbol which is started to change afterwards, the stop symbol which was determined at the start of change at the change stop timing of the 1st special symbol is removed. replace.

[First interlocking setting process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, it determines whether the forced off flag of the first special symbol is in the on state (step S1111a). ). The forced off flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

Then, the main control MPU4100a, when the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S1111a), the stop symbol of the first special symbol is replaced with disengagement, and the forced disengagement flag is turned off. It is set (step S1112a). If the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol is not on (NO in step S1111a), the first special symbol is dislocated in the hit determination process at the start of fluctuation (step S307a of the first fluctuation start process). It is the result.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the out-of-stop symbols determined in the process of step S307a or step S1112a on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113a). Therefore, in the case where the first special symbol that is changing is replaced by a deviation result depending on the second special symbol that has started to be changed later, the change stop of the second special symbol is more than the change stop timing of the first special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol that was determined at the start of variation at the variation stop timing of the second special symbol is replaced with the off symbol.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second variation start process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the second variation start process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S307b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current variation of the second special symbol is advantageous to the player as compared with the variation of the first special symbol. A second priority determination process for determination is executed (step S321b). Details of the second priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308b and ends this process.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second priority determination processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The second priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321b of the second variation start process (FIG. 171) described above.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S361b). Then, when there is no changing first special symbol (NO in step SS361b), there is no comparison target, and the present process ends.

When there is a changing first special symbol (YES in step S361b), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the result of the hit determination process of the changing first special symbol (step S362b), and the above-mentioned second The result is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307b of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 171) (step S363b).

When the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player (YES in step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first special symbol is the disengagement result (step S365b). Then, if the result is a deviation result (YES in step S365b), the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the result of outlier, that is, if it is the result of big hit (NO in step S365b), the forced outfall flag for forcibly removing the first special symbol is set to the on state (step S366b), and The process ends.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player (NO in step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol to be off (step S367b). ), and this processing ends.

In this way, in the second priority determination process, if there is the first special symbol that is changing when the change is started in the second special symbol, it is determined which variation result is advantageous to the player, If the second special symbol is advantageous, the first special symbol is dissociated, and if the second special symbol is not advantageous, the second special symbol is dissociated, so that the first special symbol and the second are changed simultaneously. Avoid hit games with special symbols.

[Processing during second fluctuation]
FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second changing process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the second changing process (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the variation time of the second special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501b, and then determines whether the forced off flag of the second special symbol is in the ON state. (Step S551b). The forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state in the process of step S366a of the first priority determination process (FIG. 168) described above.

Then, the main control MPU4100a, when the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S551b), replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with disengagement, and forcibly disengages the flag. It is set (step S552b).

After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502b on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the second special symbol that is changing is replaced by the deviation result by the first special symbol that has started to change afterwards, the stop symbol that was determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the second special symbol is removed. replace.

[Second linked setting process]
FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, it determines whether the forced off flag of the second special symbol is in the on state (step S1111b). ). The forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state in the process of step S366a of the first priority determination process (FIG. 168) described above.

Then, the main control MPU4100a, when the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S1111b), replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with disengagement, and forcibly disengages the flag to the off state. It is set (step S1112b). In addition, when the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is not on (NO in step S1111b), the second special symbol is dislocated in the hit determination process at the start of variation (step S307b of the second variation start process). It is the result.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays, on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920), the detachment stop symbol determined in the process of step S307b or step S1112b (step S1113b). Therefore, in the case where the second special symbol that is changing is replaced by a deviation result depending on the first special symbol that has started to change afterward, the variation stop of the first special symbol is more than the variation stop timing of the second special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol that was determined at the start of variation at the variation stop timing of the first special symbol is replaced with the off symbol.

Next, a characteristic process of the control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

As described above, the special symbol for which the forced disengagement flag is set to the on state is replaced with the dislocation stop symbol at the variation stop timing. Since such a special symbol is a stop symbol before replacement (a small hit, a big hit), the display contents (reach effect, etc.) of a character or the like displayed during a change in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and when the change is stopped There is a possibility that the display content (disappearance) of will be uncomfortable. For example, it is unnatural if the player character is dominant and is about to win in the battle production, but is suddenly defeated. Since many players recognize the variation result by the effect display of characters or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, they want to avoid unnaturalness (a feeling of strangeness) that occurs in the transition of the effect display.

Therefore, in the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, a process of delaying the variation result notification timing of the special symbol by the effect display of the character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the effect display indicating the deviation) than the variation stop timing of the special symbol. Execute.

[Additional forced production processing]
FIG. 175(A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the forced off effect addition process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The forced off effect addition process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (step S3321). Here, the forced disengagement flag is set to an ON state for a special symbol in which the hit stop symbol is replaced with the disengagement stop symbol at the variable stop timing. When the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is in the off state (NO in step S3321), this process ends.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU4140a, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the on state (YES in step S3321), the special symbol for which the forced off flag is set to the on state is It is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a target for variable display (step S3322). As described above, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the game mode is the rush mode, the second special symbol is varied on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. If the special symbol for which the forced disengagement flag is set to the on state is not the target to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (NO in step S3322), this process ends.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the special symbol having the forced disengagement flag set to the ON state is a target to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (YES in step S3322), the addition in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The deviation notification effect is set (step S3323), and this processing ends.

Here, the additional deviation notification effect is an effect for notifying a deviation in a predetermined period by an effect display of a character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, an effect in which the character on the player side loses in the battle effect of the character). Show. It should be noted that the display contents except the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are targeted.

FIG. 175(B) is a timing chart of the special symbol variation and the effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the additional off notification effect is set in the above-described forced off effect addition process.

As shown in FIG. 175(B), the effect display corresponding to the special symbol that is switched from the hit stop symbol to the stop symbol at the variable stop timing is selected based on the hit result, and the effect during the change is the game. There is a high possibility that it is an effect that the player expects (a character on the player side is dominant in the battle effect). It is unnatural if the sudden departure confirmation effect (defeat of the character on the player side) is executed at the variation stop timing even though such an effect has been executed. Therefore, after the change stop timing of the special symbol, the additional out-of-range notification effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make an effect transition from the expected effect (superior) to the finalized effect (defeat) without any discomfort, and to provide an effect that does not cause the player to feel discomfort (unnaturalness).

<Effect of priority control pattern>
According to the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, the first special symbol is compared with the result derived by the second special symbol to preferentially execute the special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player, and the other special symbol is Since it fluctuates and stops with a falling symbol, the special symbol that derives a big hit depending on the fluctuation stop timing as in the basic control pattern is not processed as a falling result. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original game nature (game quality) of the gaming machine than the basic control pattern.

In the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are compared with each other to derive a result that is advantageous to the player by comparing the results derived from the special symbol. Not limited to When deriving a big hit together, you may give priority to the special symbols that have started to fluctuate first, or you may prioritize the results that have priority according to the game mode, and you may decide the special symbols that have priority. ..

In addition, when the special symbol effect that is forcedly disengaged is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the additional disparity notification effect is set so that the character display effect ends with a delay from the variation stop timing of the special symbol. As a result, even the effect display associated with the hit result can be transitioned to the effect display for deriving the deviation result, so that the player who reads the result from the effect display of the character or the like can recognize the deviation without feeling uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the discomfort display.

<Interruption control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processing will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the interruption control pattern, while the hit game by the hit result that one special symbol is derived is being performed, the other special symbol interrupts the fluctuation, and the control structure that restarts the remaining fluctuation after the corresponding game ends To do.

[First special symbol control processing]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of 1st Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is in the on state in the process of step S100a. In the above-described first embodiment, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) that forcibly displaces the first special symbol and stops changing with the symbol is executed, but in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, While the hit game is being performed on the 2 special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control processing]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing a procedure of second special symbol control processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common with the 2nd special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of 1st Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is in the on state in the process of step S100b. In the above-described first embodiment, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) that forcibly disengages the second special symbol and stops changing with the symbol is executed, but in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, While the hit game is being performed on the one special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

Next, a characteristic process of the control executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

As described above, in the interruption control pattern, the variation of the other special symbol is interrupted due to the occurrence of the winning game on the side of one special symbol, but if the production that was being performed before the interruption is continued as the production after restart, the corresponding game There is a possibility that it may not be appropriate as a later effect.

Therefore, in the suspending control pattern of the present embodiment, a restarting effect changing process of changing the effect after the restart of the interrupted special symbol from the prescribed effect that was selected at the start of the variation and was performed before the interruption is executed.

[Restart production change processing]
FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the restart effect change process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The restart effect change process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current winning game is in progress (step S3331). In the present embodiment, the interlocking flag is set to the ON state at the start of the winning game and set to the OFF state at the end. Therefore, it may be determined whether the interlocking flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to the ON state. Then, if the winning game is not being played (NO in step S3331), there is no suspended change that is the target of effect change, and this processing is ended.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, if the winning game is being played (YES in step S3331), determines whether or not there is a suspended change (step S3332). This can be done by determining whether the first processing flag or the second processing flag is “2”. When the process during the first fluctuation (FIG. 129) or the process during the second fluctuation (FIG. 137) is executed (that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing), the first process flag or the The 2 processing flag is set to "2". Then, if there is no change that has been interrupted (NO in step S3332), there is no target for effect change, and this processing ends.

Next, when there is a suspended change (YES in step S3332), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the change is a hit (step S3333). If it is a hit (YES in step S3333), it is determined whether or not the hit is more advantageous to the player than the hit of the hit game currently being executed (step S3334). Here, the judgment that is advantageous to the player is similar to the judgment of which special symbol is to be prioritized in the above-mentioned priority control pattern, in the privilege that the player can obtain, the predetermined priority order, and the like. Will be done accordingly.

When the peripheral control MPU 4140a derives a winning game in which the suspended fluctuation is more advantageous to the player than the currently playing winning game (YES in step S3334), the step-up effect is performed as the effect after restart. Is set (step S3335), and this processing ends.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a derives a winning game in which the suspended fluctuation is not as great as the currently playing winning game (NO in step S3334), the bonus effect is set as the effect after the restart (step S3334). (S3336), this processing ends.

When the suspended fluctuation derives the deviation (NO in step S3333), peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the related effect as the effect after the restart (step S3337), and ends the process.

[Restart production example]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for describing an example of effects after restart in the restart effect change process (FIG. 178). Here, the variation of the second special symbol that derives the hit first is executed, and at the stop timing of the variation, the variation of the first special symbol that is started afterwards is interrupted leaving the remaining time t as an example. Explained.

Case (A) is a case for explaining the step-up effect (step S3335). Here, a small hit C occurs due to the second special symbol, and then a big hit B occurs due to the first special symbol. In this case, as the effect (restart effect) corresponding to the variation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, the step-up effect that makes the small hit C look like the big hit B is developed is set to be executed. .. Specifically, the wave after the small hit game is changed to a rough wave, and a big hit arrives.

Case (B) is a case for explaining the bonus effect (step S3336). Here, the big hit A occurs due to the second special symbol, and then the big hit B occurs due to the first special symbol. In the big hit A of the second special symbol and the big hit B of the first special symbol, it is assumed that the big hit A of the second special symbol gives a more advantageous privilege to the player. In this case, as the effect (restart effect) corresponding to the variation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after resumption, it is as if the big hit game of the first special symbol was attached to the big hit game of the second special symbol. Set to execute the bonus effect shown to. Specifically, the rough wave after the big hit game is once settled and changed to the rough wave again, and an effect that the big hit arrives is performed. In addition, in the bonus effect, especially when the interruption variation leads to a small hit, the opening timing of the special winning opening 2103 during the small hit game is notified by a countdown display of the remaining time t or the like. The small hit game can be shown as an additional privilege added to the hit game executed when the fluctuation is interrupted.

In this way, in the step-up effect and the bonus effect, the hit game on the first special symbol side and the hit game on the second special symbol side are a series of hits (a series of operations of the attacker device 2100 in both hit games). The presentation is performed as if it were there. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect after resumption from becoming an effect that is not suitable for the game situation at the time of execution, and it is possible to increase the interest by showing continuous hits as a series of hits. A game can be provided.

Case (C) is a case for explaining the related effect (step S3337). Here, a small hit C occurs due to the second special symbol, but the first special symbol interrupted at this time results in a loss. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the variation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after resumption, a related effect such as the afterglow of the small hit game (expected to develop from the small hit game) To be executed. Specifically, after a small hit game, a temporary wave is generated, but it returns calmly, and an effect of ending without shifting to a new hit game is performed.

In the case of deriving the result that the interrupted fluctuation is lost as in the case (C) described above, it is not possible to obtain the effect such as the step-up effect or the bonus effect that is related to the front and rear hit games. , Resumption of fluctuation may be stopped.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181, as a modified example of the interruption control pattern, a characteristic control process in a pattern in which the variation is terminated without being restarted when deriving an outlier result of the variation will be described. To do. Note that different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

[First interlocking setting process]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the modification example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol that has been determined when the first special symbol starts changing when the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a. Yes (step S1121a). Then, if it is out (YES in step S1121a), the determined outfall symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122a). After that, the processing related to the stop of fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed in the processing of step S1004a and thereafter.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, if the determined stop symbol of the changing first special symbol is not out, that is, if it is a hit (NO in step S1121a), the current state is continued, that is, the interruption described above. The control pattern is temporarily stopped (interrupted) (step S1021a), and this processing ends.

[Second linked setting process]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the modification example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol that has been determined when the second special symbol starts changing when the second special symbol is changing in the processing of step S1001b. Yes (step S1121b). If it is out (YES in step S1121b), the determined outfall symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122b). After that, the processing related to the stop of fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed in the processing of step S1004b and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a, if the determined stop symbol of the changing second special symbol is not out, that is, if it is a hit (NO in step S1121b), the current state is continued, that is, the above-mentioned interruption. The control pattern is temporarily stopped (interrupted) (step S1021b), and this processing ends.

In this way, in the modification example of the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the control to forcibly stop the other special symbol at the stop timing of the variation of the special symbol that derives one hit in the above-mentioned basic control pattern, and the interruption At the variation stop timing of the special symbol that derives one hit in the control pattern, the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, and a combination control with control to restart after the corresponding game is performed.

In the modified example, at the variation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one hit, the other special symbol is disengaged and stopped only when the other special symbol is lost, and interrupted when the special symbol is hit. As a result, the related effect (case (C) in FIG. 179) described above is not executed. For this reason, the restart effect due to the change interruption becomes either a step-up effect or a bonus effect, and the execution of the restart effect itself can be a highly anticipated notice effect (hit confirmation effect).

<Effect of interruption control pattern>
According to the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol that have occurred can be changed and executed as a result based on the random numbers obtained. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the special symbols that fluctuates at the same time was forcibly set to be off regardless of the acquired random number, but in the interruption control pattern, the result of the special symbol that the player acquired ( The hit determination result based on random numbers will not be overridden. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the gaming nature of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

Also, in the interruption control pattern, while the winning game is performed by the hit result derived from one special symbol, the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining fluctuation is restarted after the corresponding game ends. At this time, the effect (restart effect) corresponding to the restarted fluctuation is newly set in accordance with the preceding and following game situations (a winning game on one special symbol side and a game derived by the fluctuation). As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that does not feel uncomfortable even if the suspended fluctuation is restarted. Further, when the interrupted variation derives the winning game, it is possible to make the relevant game appear to be related to the winning game on the side of one of the special symbols by the restart effect, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

<Reset control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processing will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the reset control pattern, while one hitting game by the hit result derived from the special symbol is being performed, the other special symbol suspends the variation, and the variation suspended after the corresponding game is finished is reviewed according to the gaming state. It features a control structure that restarts after

[Processing during first fluctuation]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first changing process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the first changing process (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521a until the variation time of the first special symbol times up in the process of step S501a. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the off state before the process of step S521a (step S561a).

Here, the reset flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S1134a of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 183) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when a reset setting process for resetting the fluctuation time of the suspended fluctuation according to the game state is executed.

[First interlocking setting process]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on (step S1131a). If the reset flag is in the on state (YES in step S1131a), the current state is continued, that is, the current state is temporarily stopped (interrupted) as in the interrupt control pattern described above (step S1021a). The process ends.

On the other hand, when the reset flag is not in the on state (NO in step S1131a), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the first fluctuation timer (step S1132a). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the gaming state (step S1133a), the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134a), and then this processing is ended. Here, the processing of steps S1132a to S1134a is the reset setting processing. The target to be reset in the suspended fluctuation is not limited to the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation, but may be the entire control content required for the fluctuation time such as the fluctuation pattern.

Thus, in the reset control pattern, when the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting process for the variation after the restart is executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the ON state, and the first special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the first interlocking flag is released to the OFF state, and the temporarily stopped state. Become. Then, when the first interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the first changing process is restarted, the reset flag is returned to the off state and the subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, the change). Will be restarted).

[Processing during second fluctuation]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second changing process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those in the second changing process (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521b until the variation time of the second special symbol times up in the process of step S501b. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the off state before the processing of step S521b (step S561b).

Here, the reset flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S1134b of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 185) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when a reset setting process for resetting the fluctuation time of the suspended fluctuation according to the game state is executed.

[Second linked setting process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. The same processes as those of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on (step S1131b). Then, when the reset flag is in the on state (YES in step S1131b), the current state is continued, that is, the stop state (interruption state) is temporarily set as in the interruption control pattern described above (step S1021b), and The process ends.

On the other hand, when the reset flag is not on (NO in step S1131b), main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the second fluctuation timer (step S1132b). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the game state (step S1133b), the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134b), and then this processing is ended.

Thus, in the reset control pattern, when the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting process for the variation after the restart is executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the ON state, and the second special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the second interlocking flag is released to the OFF state, and the temporarily stopped state. Become. Then, when the second interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the second changing process is restarted, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and the subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, the change). Will be restarted).

<Effect of reset control pattern>
According to the reset control pattern of the second embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol generated similarly to the above-described interruption control pattern can be changed and executed as a result based on the obtained random numbers. Therefore, the reset control pattern can maintain the original game playability of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

In addition, the reset control pattern changes the remaining variation time of the interrupted special symbol according to the game state. Here, the suspension of the variation of the special symbol is caused by the hit game on the other special symbol side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode after the relevant game has been transferred to another game mode. Therefore, if the variation due to the variation pattern set based on the game mode before the transition is resumed as it is, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, according to the reset control pattern, the control contents such as the fluctuation time are reviewed for the fluctuations restarted after the winning game, so that the fluctuations are provided according to the gaming state in which the fluctuations are executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. be able to. Further, since the degree of freedom in the effect in the change at the time of restart is increased as compared with the above-mentioned interruption control pattern, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

Specifically, according to the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (FIG. 154(E)), it may be reviewed. For example, if the variation that derives the outlier result of the second special symbol is interrupted, if the game mode after the transition is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, it is reset to a long time variation, and the game mode after the transition is rushed. If it is a mode, it may be reset for a short time.

In addition, when the game mode is the rush mode, it is desirable to consume the number of STs and frequently generate the small hit C and the small hit D of the second special symbol. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 186, reset setting in the case where the first special symbol for deriving the big hit occurs in the state where the ST number remains in the rush mode will be described.

FIG. 186 is a timing chart for explaining resetting setting processing of interruption variation in the resetting control pattern of the second embodiment. As mentioned above, in the rush mode, if the first special symbol for deriving the big hit occurs in the state where the ST number remains, if possible, the ST number given in the current game is exhausted and then the first special symbol We want to reach the big hit game (that is, give a new ST count).

Therefore, when the big hit variation occurs in the first special symbol when the remaining ST number is less than the predetermined number (here, less than 5), the big hit variation is interrupted by the small hit game of the second special symbol. The variable time after resuming when it is reset is set to a long time t1. The long time t1 is, for example, a time obtained by extending the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time during which a small hit game can be expected to occur.

Then, while the big hit variation of the first special symbol restarts the variation of the long time t1, a small hit variation of the second special symbol occurs, and the stop timing of the small hit variation is reached. Then, the jackpot fluctuation is interrupted again. Since the variation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is a short variation of 1 second (FIG. 154(E)), the ST number is digested with good tempo.

Then, when the number of remaining STs becomes one, the variable time after re-starting is set to the short time t2. The short time t2 is, for example, a time obtained by shortening the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time such that the fluctuation does not end even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the number of ST times is 0 occurs during that time. is there. As a result, the jackpot variation of the first special symbol that frequently causes interruptions is effective in the number of STs, that is, the variation can be stopped in the probability variation state determined to be the jackpot result, thus disturbing the original gaming performance of the gaming machine. Never.

In this way, according to the reset control pattern, it is possible to adjust the variation time after the fluctuation restart of the interrupted special symbol according to the game state, so not only the fluctuation control of the interrupted special symbol, It is also possible to adjust the variation efficiency of the special symbol in the gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to flexibly cope with a wide variety of supposed game characteristics, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Also in the reset control pattern, similarly to the above-described interruption control pattern, the production situation (reproduction production) corresponding to the restarted variation is played back and forth (a winning game on one special symbol side and a game in which the variation is derived). If a new setting is made in accordance with the above, it is possible to provide an even more unnatural feeling. Further, when the interrupted variation derives the winning game, it is possible to make the relevant game appear to be related to the winning game on the side of one of the special symbols by the restart effect, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

As described above, according to the present invention, a control structure that employs any or a combination of the basic control pattern, the priority control pattern, the interruption control pattern, and the reset control pattern described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment is provided, It avoids that a specific game (small hit game, big hit game) is duplicated between the game on the side of the first special symbol and the game on the side of the second special symbol, and can be varied simultaneously. Here, even if the winning of the game ball to the prize area occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery game is in the standby state. Since the winning tempo of the game ball (that is, the player's game tempo) and the lottery game tempo are different from each other, the interest of the game is lowered. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned decrease in the interest of the game by the simultaneous variation control.

(Third Embodiment)
The pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above. In the above-mentioned basic control pattern and priority control pattern, when simultaneous fluctuations occur, one special figure fluctuation that has fluctuated according to the set fluctuation pattern is shifted and stopped at the end timing of the other special figure fluctuation. A case arises. When the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performing an effect relating to one of the special figure fluctuations, the fluctuation suddenly falls off and the effect ends, so that the player who is watching the effect feels strange. , There is a concern that it may reduce the interest of the game. In particular, if a production with high expectations is being performed, it is possible for the player to have a negative impression such as disappointment, discomfort, or discouragement as the end of the production due to sudden deviation fluctuation stop There is a nature.

Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, even if the effect related to one of the special figure fluctuations is suddenly ended due to the deviation fluctuation stop, effect control capable of preventing a decrease in the interest of the game may be performed.

Further, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the second embodiment described above, since the effect of special figure variation (one special figure variation) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening recommended by the game mode is displayed, The abrupt end of the effect may occur due to a special figure change (the other special figure change) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening not recommended by the game mode.

Therefore, in order to prevent the liquid crystal display device 1900 from suddenly ending the effect related to one of the special figure variations, it is sufficient to perform control capable of suppressing the occurrence of winning of the game ball into the starting opening which is not recommended in the game mode in the first place. Specifically, aiming prevention control is performed to prevent the player from aiming at a start opening that is not recommended.

In the third embodiment, with reference to FIG. 187 to FIG. 190, a more detailed effect control and aiming prevention will be given by taking a gaming machine having a control structure capable of simultaneous variation and applying the basic control pattern of the second embodiment as an example. The control will be described.

<Direction control>
[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the liquid crystal display process in the third embodiment. The same processes as those of the liquid crystal display process (FIG. 165) of the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010, the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, the normal mode (low accurate non-time saving state) or rush preparation mode (high accuracy time saving state) (NO in step S3201), And when the main control MPU4100a executes the hit variation that derives the hit result on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the switching effect process is executed (step S3211). In the switching effect process, the default effect that has been executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the effect related to the variation on the first special symbol side is changed to the switching effect, and the switching effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. To do.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a, the current game mode is the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state) (YES in step S3201), and the main control MPU4100a derives the hit result on the first special symbol side. When is executed (YES in step S3205), a switching effect process is executed (step S3212). In the switching effect process, the default effect that has been executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the effect relating to the variation on the second special symbol side is changed to the switching effect, and the switching effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. To do.

As described above, in the liquid crystal display process according to the present embodiment, when the other special figure fluctuation different from the special figure fluctuation to be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 starts the fluctuation for deriving the hit, the liquid crystal display apparatus 1900. It is characterized in that the switching effect processing for switching the effect in (1) to another effect (switching effect) different from the effect related to the special figure change to be displayed is performed.

The processes of steps S3203 and S3206 in the liquid crystal display process of the second embodiment described above are also one pattern of the switching effect process. In the second embodiment, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out as the switching effect, so that the player does not see the place where the special figure change being effected is forcibly stopped. As described above, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in blackout display when the special figure fluctuation that was being displayed forcibly is forcibly disengaged and stopped, so that the special force fluctuation is forcibly stopped by the player. Do not perceive. The blackout switching effect can provide an effect that can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, the blackout functions as a notice effect that gives a notice that a hit will occur due to another special figure change. As a result, it is possible to induce the player's interest in deriving the hit by the other special figure fluctuation, rather than the special figure fluctuation which was being displayed in the presentation being suddenly discontinued and stopped by the fluctuation stop. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect capable of suppressing the induction of a negative impression in the simultaneous variation control (which can prevent a decrease in interest in the game).

[Switching effect processing]
FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switching effect process in the third embodiment.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the shift to the present process is the variation of the hit of the second special symbol (step S3221). Then, if it is a variation of the second special symbol (YES in step S3221), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation of the remaining is 5 seconds (step S3222). As the variation time of the second special symbol, a timer value counted in the second variation process (FIG. 173) may be received from the main control board 4100, or a count timer provided in the peripheral control board 4010 may be provided. You may read the timer value.

Here, the variation of the second special symbol is set to vary between 5 seconds and 90 seconds (see FIG. 154(E)). Therefore, in the switching effect process of the present embodiment, control is performed to switch the effect only for the remaining 5 seconds of the variation time of the second special symbol that derives the hit result, and until then, the effect regarding the variation of the first special symbol that is being displayed. Is displayed.

When the variation time of the second special symbol is not 5 seconds (NO in step S3222), peripheral control MPU 4140a continues the normal display effect on liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3223). On the other hand, when the variation time of the second special symbol is 5 seconds (YES in step S3222), the normal display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed instead of the first switching effect (step). S3224). The first switching effect is an effect in which a display effect for 5 seconds is set, and it is an effect that seems to be an extension of the effect up to that point, and is an effect that causes the first special symbol to appear as if it has finished changing due to the disengagement result. Alternatively, it may be an effect of notifying that the second special symbol has been hit. The first switching effect may be an effect that does not induce a negative impression to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation variation of the second special symbol occurs during the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the second special symbol is hit in the liquid crystal display device 1900 that displays the first special symbol. A normal display effect for the first special symbol to be displayed is performed until 5 seconds before the fluctuation stops. Then, at 5 seconds before the variation stop of the second special symbol, the display is switched from the display effect of the first special symbol to the first switching effect. This makes it possible to prevent the first special symbol from coming off suddenly and stopping the interest of the game from decreasing.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the trigger of the transition to the present process is not the variation fluctuation of the second special symbol, that is, when the variation variation of the first special symbol is (NO in step S3221) The normal display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed instead of the second switching effect (step S3225). The second switching effect may be, for example, an effect based on a variation pattern set in the first special symbol for deriving the hit, or whether the effect regarding the variation of the second special symbol being displayed is continued (extended). Such an effect may be used, or a preset specific effect may be used.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the first special symbol is generated during the rush mode, the second switching effect is generated in the liquid crystal display device 1900 which displays the second special symbol when the corresponding variation starts. To do. In the basic control pattern in the present embodiment (that is, the second embodiment), from the start to the end of the variation of the hit of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is the result of the deviation, so that it is a short time It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by making the liquid crystal display device 1900 display the production related to the first special symbol that derives the hit rather than the variation (1 second) second special symbol. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the other special symbol for deriving the hit when the other special symbol derives the hit even in the state where one special symbol is the display target according to the game mode. It has a control function that can be switched to the target.

In the switching effect process of the present embodiment, the switching timing of the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the predetermined stop time (5 seconds) of fluctuation of the second special symbol that is not the display target in the normal mode or the rush preparation mode. Previously, when the game mode is the rush mode, the first special symbol which is not the display target is set to start changing, but it is not limited to this. In the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, you may switch to the first switching effect at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (see a modified example described later), and in the rush mode, the variation stop predetermined of the second special symbol. When the time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is reached, the second switching effect may be switched to. In addition, when a variation in hit special figure that triggers the switching timing of the effect occurs in the game mode, if the variation time of the corresponding special figure variation is longer than the remaining time of the variation of special figure in the production, the display The effect may be switched after the end of the special figure change during the effect (see a modification described later).

[Timing chart for switching effect control]
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, an example of effect transition regarding the switching effect control in the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described. FIG. 189 is a timing chart illustrating the switching effect control of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 189(A), in the conventional mode (first embodiment) and the rush preparation mode, the display target in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the first special symbol. Then, when the deviation variation of the first special symbol is displayed in the high-expectation effect (special first effect), when the second special symbol that is a small hit occurs, the special character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. 1st production is suddenly disengaged at the timing when the corresponding fluctuation stops and ends.

FIG. 189(B) is a timing chart illustrating an example of the first switching effect of the present embodiment. In the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, if the second special symbol that is a small hit occurs when the deviation variation of the first special symbol is being executed, the liquid crystal display device becomes 5 seconds before the small hit variation stops. The display in 1900 is switched from the special 1 effect to the first switching effect. For example, the first switching effect is a pseudo special 1 effect that uses the same character as the special 1 effect that has been displayed so far, and has an effect pattern that leads to a result that deviates from the high-expectation special 1 effect without a sense of discomfort. .. The change corresponding to the special first effect is led to the result through the first switching effect, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Also, FIG. 189(C) is a timing chart illustrating an example of the second switching effect of the present embodiment. If the first special symbol that is a big hit occurs when the deviation variation of the second special symbol is executed in the rush mode, the big hit variation starts and at the same time, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed from the special second effect to the second effect. Switch to switching production. For example, the second switching effect is a special first effect corresponding to a change in the first special symbol that is a big hit. Although the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the rush mode targets the game on the side of the second special symbol as a display target, the variation time of the second special symbol is a short-term variation (1 second), and the variation of the first special symbol which is a big hit. The fluctuation of the second special symbol is always out of the inside. Therefore, if the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs the second switching effect different from the special second effect, the interest of the game is enhanced.

[Modification of switching effect execution process]
Further, in the switching effect execution process (FIG. 188) of the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, when the variation time of the second special symbol for deriving the hit is 5 seconds remaining, the normal display effect is switched to the first switching effect. Switch to production. In the rush mode, the normal display effect is switched to the second switching effect when the variation of the first special symbol for deriving the hit is started. On the other hand, in the modified example, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, switching to the first switching effect at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the remaining of the second special symbol during the change time of the first special symbol in the rush mode is displayed. When it is longer than the variation time, it is characterized by switching to the second switching effect after the variation of the second special symbol being displayed ends.

FIG. 190(A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switching effect execution process of the modified example of the third embodiment, and FIG. 190(B) is a diagram showing an example of the first switching effect determination table. The same processes as those of the liquid crystal display process (FIG. 188) of the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 triggered the transition to the present processing when the second special symbol hit variation (YES in step S3221), based on the first switching effect determination table. The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the first switching effect determined by (step S3231).

In the first switching effect determination table, as shown in FIG. 190(B), effect patterns are set in association with the variation times (5 seconds to 90 seconds) of the second special symbols in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. ing. The effect pattern (for example, A to F) that matches the hit variation time of the second special symbol that triggered the transition to this processing may be an effect whose mode is determined in advance, or an effect which has been displayed until then. It may be a presentation that looks as if it were an extension.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the trigger of the transition to the present process is not the variation fluctuation of the second special symbol, that is, when the variation variation of the first special symbol is (NO in step S3221) Then, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the relevant variation is longer than the remaining variation time of the second special symbol being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3232). Then, when the variation time of the variation of the first special symbol is shorter than the remaining variation time of the second special symbol being displayed (NO in step S3232), the variation start of the first special symbol is started as in the present embodiment. Sometimes the normal display effect is switched to the second switching effect (step S3225). The variation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode of the present embodiment is 1 second, while the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 1 to 30 seconds, so in the specifications of the present embodiment. It is always determined that the variation time of the variation of the first special symbol is longer than the remaining variation time of the second special symbol being displayed.

Peripheral control MPU4140a, if the variation time of the variation variation of the first special symbol is longer than the remaining variation time of the second special symbol being displayed (YES in step S3232), the variation of the second special symbol ends. Until (NO in step S3233), the normal display effect (effect regarding the second special symbol) is continued (step S3234). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends (YES in step S3233), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched from the normal display effect to the second switch effect (step S3225).

Thus, in the modified example, the second special symbol is preferentially displayed until the variation of the second special symbol being displayed is stopped in the rush mode, and after the stop is switched to the second switching effect. At this time, the first special symbol has begun to change, but it may be switched to a variation pattern effect that is set based on the hit variation of the changing first special symbol as the second switching effect.

<Effect of switching effect control>
According to the switching effect control in the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the third embodiment, the variation variation of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening which is not recommended in the current game mode, that is, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not the display target. When the hit variation occurs, the default effect of the special figure variation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed in place of another effect (switching effect) different from the default effect. Note that the timing of changing the effect may be at the start of the hit variation or when the variation time of the hit variation reaches a predetermined time. As a result, the player does not see a scene in which the fluctuation during display suddenly ends and ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment described above, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out as a switching effect. Also in this case, the player does not see the scene where the fluctuation in the display suddenly comes off and ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, like the switching effect control of the modified example, the timing for switching the default effect of the special figure fluctuation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to another effect (switching effect) is the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation being displayed. Is shorter than the variation time of the hit variation that triggers the execution of this process, when the variation of the special figure variation being displayed ends. In this case, in the first place, the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not suddenly stop the fluctuation during the display and stop. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

<Aiming prevention control>
Next, aiming prevention control that does not cause the player to aim at a starting opening not recommended by the game mode will be described. The above is the production control that prevents a decrease in the interest of the game when a variation in hitting based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, which is not recommended, occurs, and is a countermeasure on the peripheral control board 4010 side. Here, the countermeasures on the side of the main control board 4100 are enumerated, which are the controls that are not recommended in the first place, which are controls that suppress the occurrence of a hit variation based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening.

[1. Variable time]
First, the variation time of special symbols not recommended in the game mode may be set to a long time. As a result, even if the player wins a game ball in a start port which is not recommended, the variation of the corresponding special symbol does not end when it starts, so the variation efficiency is poor and the game is stagnate. In this way, aiming is prevented by preventing the player from having an interest in the game on the special symbol side corresponding to the start port which is not recommended.

Specifically, in the above-described first embodiment, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in which "left hitting" is recommended, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the probability of a small hit is high. By hitting the right side, it is possible to prevent the aiming of the second starting opening 2102 which can easily win the prize.

[2. Number of fluctuation patterns]
Also, a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) of special symbols not recommended in the game mode may be set. As a result, it is difficult to predict the timing at which the non-recommended special symbols stop changing. Therefore, even if the player wins, it becomes difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2103. In this way, aiming is prevented by preventing the player from having an interest in the game on the special symbol side corresponding to the start port which is not recommended.

Specifically, in the above-described second embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times of the second special symbol are set in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in which "left-handed" is recommended. When it is a variation for deriving a hit, a plurality of values are set within a range of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and when it is a variation for deriving an outlier, it is set to 600 seconds. A plurality of variation patterns of the second special symbol are provided corresponding to a plurality of variation times (for example, 50 patterns), and the "right hitting" is continued aiming at the second starting opening 2102 which has a high probability of winning and can be easily won. Even if a player wins a prize ball, the variation pattern mode (variation time, number of patterns) is set so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Even if a prize ball is obtained by hitting the second special symbol, the number of game balls launched by "right hitting" is set to be larger than the number of game balls obtained. In this way, aiming is prevented by preventing the player from having an interest in the game on the special symbol side corresponding to the start port which is not recommended. In addition, by including a long-time fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation efficiency can be reduced, and the above-described effect can be made more effective.

[3. Special winning opening opening mode and board structure]
Further, in the game board of the present embodiment (see FIG. 152), when a player hits a game ball aiming at the special winning opening 2103 (that is, when "right hitting"), the game ball is launched in the game area. It is configured such that the predetermined time from the start of winning the special winning opening 2103 is longer than the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 due to the small hit. As a result, even if the special winning opening 2103 is opened on the basis of a small hit variation due to a ball not entering the starting opening which is not recommended, the player confirms the opening of the special winning opening 2103 and performs the launching operation of the game ball. Then, the launched game ball is not in time for opening the special winning opening 2103. Since the special winning opening 2103 has finished opening by the time the launched game ball reaches the special winning opening 2103, it is difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball aiming at opening the big winning opening 2103. In this way, aiming is prevented by preventing the player from having an interest in the game on the special symbol side corresponding to the start port which is not recommended.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 based on the small win is 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the game ball shot by the player aiming at the special winning opening 2103 requires about 3 seconds as the predetermined time until reaching the special winning opening 2103, so that the game area in which the game ball can roll at this time is A rolling inhibition member (not shown) that inhibits rolling to the special winning opening 2103 is arranged. Here, the rolling inhibition member is a member that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling toward the special winning opening 2103. For example, it may be a plurality of obstacle nails that are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, or may be convex ribs. Further, it may be a movable piece that is always movable in each cycle with a time shorter than the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 based on the small hit winning as a constant cycle. The movable piece is movably controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 to limit the rolling of the game ball to the special winning opening 2103.

<Effect of aiming prevention control>
According to the aiming prevention control of the third embodiment, as a countermeasure on the side of the main control board 4100, the game mode (long time variation time setting, plural variation time setting) is set according to the game mode. Further, by adjusting the rolling inhibition member and the game mode (the opening time of the special winning opening) in the game area, the winning efficiency to the special winning opening 2103 is lowered. As a result, when aiming at a start opening that is not recommended in the game mode, the efficiency of the change is reduced, and the number of game balls launched against the number of acquired game balls is large, so that the game is disadvantageous to the player. It can be set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the launching operation (aiming strike) aimed at the starting opening which is not recommended to the player.

<Movable accessory control>
Regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 may be accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory. If the operation of the movable accessory is continued in the effect mode corresponding to the special symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (one special symbol), the special symbol is suddenly changed at the variation stop timing of the other special symbol which is not the display object. When finished, the display screen may be covered by the movable accessory, and the determined symbol (variation result) may be invisible to the player.

Therefore, even if the display timing of the variation result in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed in relation to the above-described effect control (FIGS. 187 to 190), the movable accessory obscures the result display and obstructs the visual recognition of the player. The movable accessory control may be performed so as not to do so.

In the third embodiment, with reference to FIG. 191 and FIG. 192, the movable character effect process performed when the effect on the special symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes the motion effect of the movable character. Will be described.

[Movable accessory production processing]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable accessory production process in the third embodiment. The movable accessory production process is one of the production control processes (step S3102) of the 16 ms steady process (FIG. 151) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010, and is repeatedly executed every 16 ms.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether or not the movable accessory flag is on (step S3301). The movable accessory flag is set to the ON state when it is indicated that the movable accessory is operated in the effect. Then, when the movable accessory flag is off, that is, when the movable accessory is not operated (NO in step S3301), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory flag is on (YES in step S3301), the peripheral control MPU 4140a drives the motor or the like in an effect mode according to the command (variation pattern command or the like) received from the main control board 4100. The control for controlling the device to operate the movable accessory is executed (step S3302). The command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S3101, FIG. 151) described above. The movable accessory flag described above is set to the ON state when necessary in this command analysis processing.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not there is a variation that derives a hit on the special symbol side that is not the display target of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3303). Specifically, if the current game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the variation of the second special symbol for deriving the hit starts during the production of the first special symbol which requires the motion effect of the movable accessory this time. It is determined whether it has been done. Here, it suffices to determine whether or not the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol is turned on. Similarly, when the current game mode is the rush mode, it is determined whether or not the variation of the first special symbol for deriving the hit during the production of the second special symbol is started. Here, it suffices to determine whether or not the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is turned on.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the origin detection of the movable accessory (step S3304) when a new hit variation is started (is performed) (YES in step S3303). The origin detection is a process of detecting the origin state to determine whether or not there is a movable accessory at the origin (initial position) that indicates a stationary state (housed state).

When it is determined that the movable accessory is at the origin (YES in step S3305), that is, when the movable accessory is at the initial position, peripheral control MPU 4140a prohibits the operation of the movable accessory (step S3305). S3306). Then, the movable accessory flag is set to the off state (step S3310), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the movable accessory is at the origin (NO in step S3305), that is, if the movable accessory is in the operating state, peripheral control MPU 4140a is detected in the process of S3303 described above. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the impact variation is 5 seconds remaining (step S3307). Here, the time required for the movable accessory to return to the initial position from the maximum appearance position where the movable accessory moves most is set to 5 seconds. The remaining time determined in the process of step S3307 may be the maximum time required for the movable accessory to return to the initial position.

Peripheral control MPU4140a returns a movable accessory to an origin, when the fluctuation time remains 5 seconds (YES in step S3307) (step S3308). Then, the movable accessory flag is set to the off state (step S3310), and this processing ends.

If the fluctuation time is not 5 seconds remaining, that is, if the fluctuation time is longer than 5 seconds (NO in step S3307), peripheral control MPU 4140a continues the effect operation by the movable accessory, and step S3308 described later. Process shifts to.

Peripheral control MPU4140a, when new hit variation is not started (NO in step S3303) and when the remaining variation time is longer than 5 seconds even after hit variation is started (NO in step S3307). ), the effect operation by the movable accessory is continued, and it is determined whether or not the operation is completed (step S3309). Then, if the operation has not been completed (NO in step S3309), this process is completed.

When the operation of the movable accessory is completed (YES in step S3309), peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the movable accessory flag to the off state (step S3310), and ends the process.

In the process of step S3307 described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the remaining variation time of the variation of the special symbol that is not the display target of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is 5 seconds. This is to secure the maximum time (5 seconds) required for the movable accessory in operation to reliably return to the origin (initial position) in the variation of the special symbol to be displayed, and the variation during the display is forcibly stopped. It is premised that the variation time of the hit variation that is the trigger is set for the maximum time or more. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode is set to 5 seconds or more, but the variation time of the first special symbol in the rush mode is set to 1 to 30 seconds. .. Therefore, the variation time for deriving the first special symbol hit in the rush mode is set to 5 to 30 seconds.

In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode (when the display target is the first special symbol) when the hit variation occurs on the second special symbol side, , The normal display effect (effect on the first special symbol side) is performed until the remaining time of the hit variation becomes 5 seconds, and when the remaining time becomes 5 seconds, the first switching effect is switched to. Therefore, also in this process, the movable accessory that was operating as the effect of the first special symbol until the remaining time of the variation of the second special symbol changed to 5 seconds so as to follow the display content on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The movable accessory is returned to the origin before the movement is stopped and the movement stops, but the invention is not limited to this. In the switching effect process (FIG. 190(A)) of the modified example, the first switching by the effect pattern (FIG. 190(B)) corresponding to the fluctuation time of the relevant fluctuation at the time when the second fluctuation of the special symbol is started. Switch to production. Correspondingly, the movable accessory may be returned to the origin at the time when the variation of the second special symbol is started, or the effect pattern of the movable accessory is shown in the effect pattern (FIG. 190(B)). If set, the movable accessory may be operated as the first switching effect. Further, when the game mode is the rush mode (when the display target is the second special symbol), when the variation of the hit occurs on the first special symbol side, the display content is changed to the second switching effect from the start of the variation of the hit. It is switched (see FIG. 188). In this process, in the same situation, the movable accessory continues the usual motion effect as before, and returns to the origin (stops the motion) immediately before the first special symbol stops at a hit, but this Not exclusively. When the hit variation of the first special symbol is started, the action effect of the movable accessory corresponding to the hit variation of the first special symbol may be performed as the second switching effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory control by the processing of steps S3303 to S3308 is performed in the movable accessory effect processing which is repeatedly executed every 16 ms, but the present invention is not limited to this. These processes may be independent processes, and may be executed when the ON state of the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is received from the main control board 4100 side.

[Example of performance transition]
FIG. 192 is an example of an effect transition explaining the movable accessory control of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 192(A), normally, the movable accessory is housed on the back side of the game board 4 and on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to be invisible to the player. Here, the movable accessory can move in the left-right direction. When the movable accessory on both the left and right sides is moved to the maximum toward the center of the screen, the front of the display screen is completely covered and the player cannot see the display screen.

When the movable accessory starts operating from the origin, two doors (movable accessory) appear from the left and right of the liquid crystal display device 1900 toward the center of the screen. At this time, even if there is a hit variation that derives the hit on the special symbol side that is not the display target, the movable accessory continues to move toward the center of the screen until the variation time of the relevant variation reaches 5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 192(B), if the variation time of the variation of the special symbol that is not the display target in the current game mode becomes 5 seconds, the two doors (movable accessory) are set up to that point. The operation according to the effect mode that has been performed is stopped and the operation of returning to the origin is started. Therefore, with the operation of returning to the origin of the movable accessory, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 switches from the covered state (invisible state) to the visible state. Here, the timing of starting the operation of returning to the origin is set so that the movable accessory can return to the origin from the maximum movable position before the variation result is displayed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 192C, when the variation result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the movable accessory returns to the origin. Therefore, the movable accessory does not cover and obstruct the display screen when the player visually recognizes the variation result.

<Effect of moving accessory control>
According to the movable accessory control of the third embodiment, not the game on the special symbol side of the display target on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but when the stop timing of the variation is determined by the game on the other special symbol side, the other At the start of variation on the special symbol side, origin detection is performed to determine whether or not the movable accessory is at the origin, and operation control of the future movable accessory is determined. If it is determined that the movable accessory is at the origin, the operation of the movable accessory is prohibited, and if it is not determined that the movable accessory is at the origin, the origin before the fluctuation of the other special symbol side is stopped. Return to. As a result, since the movable accessory is always at the origin (housed state) when the fluctuation is stopped, there is a concern that the movable accessory covers the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the player cannot visually confirm the symbol determination. It can be resolved.

<State transition control>
In the game mode of the present invention, there are a normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state), a rush preparation mode (high-probability time saving state) and a rush mode (high precision non-time saving state), and a game mode is a rush preparation mode and a rush mode. Upon entering, 70 ST numbers are given. Then, in each mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode when the fluctuation of 70 times ends without a big hit occurring (see FIG. 155).

Here, normally, the transition of the game mode is carried out when the game executed in the current game mode ends. Specifically, in the rush preparation mode or the rush mode, the 70th variation end in which the big hit lottery is performed in the probable variation state is used as a trigger to shift to the normal mode. In addition, when a variation that derives the hit occurs before reaching 70 times, the game is shifted to another game mode through the hit game related to the variation. Then, the internal control at this time sets the game mode by the main control board 4100 turning on/off the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and the peripheral control board 4010 sends a state designation command from the main control board 4100 when the fluctuation is confirmed. By receiving, the effect corresponding to the set game mode is executed. Regarding the number of STs counted on the main control board 4100 side, the peripheral control board 4010 displays the current remaining number of STs on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

However, as shown in FIG. 201(A) described later, in the basic control pattern as in the present embodiment (when one of the variations is a winning variation, the other variation started during the variation is a deviation in the non-lottery). , When the number of STs is 70th with one special symbol, the variation is not executed with the other special symbol when the variation variation is started, and the variation is started with the other special symbol after the variation variation is started. In the case of the variation of the other special symbol, the jackpot lottery (determination) is executed in a high probability state even though the ST number has already ended. Thus, in the control structure in which the fluctuations of the two special symbols can simultaneously fluctuate, even if the fluctuations occur at the same timing, a case may occur in which one is a fluctuation subject to a probability variation and the other is a variation not a probability variation target.

Therefore, in the game mode to which the probability variation function is added, the state transition control may be performed so that the appropriate number of variations is determined in the high probability state. Specifically, the present embodiment is characterized in that the stop timing (state transition timing) of the probability variation function accompanying the ST number of times is exhausted at the start of variation, not at the end of the 70th variation. The state transition control of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 193A to 201.

[First fluctuation start processing]
193A and 193B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the first variation start process in the third embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 157) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the process (steps S331a to S336a) of setting the state designation command before executing the process of step S309a.

First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the ST count subtracted and updated in the process of step S303a has become 0 (step S331a). Then, when the ST count becomes 0 (YES in step S331a), the probability variation flag is set to the off state (step S332a), and then the process proceeds to step S333a. If the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S331a), the process proceeds to step S333a.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines from the state of the time saving flag whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S333a). Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S333a), it is determined whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S334a). The time saving function of the present embodiment operates when the probability variation flag is in the on state, and stops when it is in the off state. Therefore, when the probability variation flag is in the off state, it is determined that the time saving function end condition is satisfied, and the time saving function is stopped (step S335a). If the time saving function is not operating (NO in step S333a) and if the time saving function end condition is not satisfied (NO in step S334a), the process proceeds to step S336a.

Finally, the main control MPU 4100a sets a state instruction command including information such as the on/off state of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, the number of remaining STs, and the like (step S336a), and proceeds to the processing of step S309a. The state instruction command set here is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 together with the variation pattern command at the start of variation. The peripheral control board 4010 selects and executes an effect according to the received command.

[Processing during first fluctuation]
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first changing process in the third embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the first changing process (FIG. 129) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment (first embodiment) are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the state transition processing of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag (steps S331a to S336a) is executed in the first variation start processing, the same processing (step S511a) that is conventionally executed when the variation is stopped. ~S516a) is deleted.

[First interlocking setting process]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the third embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 159) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the state transition processing (steps S331a to S336a) of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is executed in the first variation start processing, the same processing (step S1005a) that is conventionally executed when the variation is stopped. ~S1010a) is deleted.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
196A and 196B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the second variation start process in the third embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the second fluctuation start process (FIG. 160) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a process of setting a state designation command (steps S331b to S336b) before executing the process of step S309b.

First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the ST count subtracted and updated in the process of step S303b has become 0 (step S331b). Then, when the ST number becomes 0 (YES in step S331b), the probability variation flag is set to the off state (step S332b), and then the process proceeds to step S333b. If the ST count is not 0 (NO in step S331b), the process proceeds to step S333b.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines from the state of the time saving flag whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S333b). Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S333b), it is determined whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S334b). The time saving function of the present embodiment operates when the probability variation flag is in the on state, and stops when it is in the off state. Therefore, when the probability variation flag is in the OFF state, the time saving function end condition is satisfied, and the time saving function is stopped (step S335b). If the time saving function is not operating (NO in step S333b) and if the time saving function end condition is not satisfied (NO in step S334b), the process proceeds to step S336b.

Finally, the main control MPU 4100a sets a state instruction command including information such as the on/off states of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag and the number of remaining STs (step S336b), and proceeds to the processing of step S309b. The state instruction command set here is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 together with the variation pattern command at the start of variation. The peripheral control board 4010 selects and executes an effect according to the received command.

[Processing during second fluctuation]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second changing process in the third embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the second mid-fluctuation process (FIG. 137) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment (first embodiment) are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the state transition processing of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag (steps S331b to S336b) is executed in the second variation start processing, and therefore the same processing (step S511b) that was conventionally performed when the variation was stopped. ~S516b) is deleted.

[Second small hit game processing]
FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second small hit game processing in the third embodiment. In addition, about the process common with the 2nd small hit game process (FIG. 162) in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and description is abbreviate|omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the state transition processing of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag (steps S331b to S336b) is executed in the second variation start processing, the same processing that is conventionally executed at the end of the small hit game ( Steps S923b to S928b) are deleted.

[Second linked setting process]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the third embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 163) in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the state transition processing of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag (steps S331b to S336b) is executed in the second variation start processing, and therefore the same processing (step S1005b) that was conventionally executed when the variation stopped. ~S1010b) is deleted.

[Pseudo production processing]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pseudo effect process in the third embodiment. The pseudo effect process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU 414a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a state designation command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3401). When the state designation command is received (YES in step S3401), the state designation command received last time is compared with the state designation command received this time (step S3402). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag has changed from on (previous) to off (current) (step S3403).

When the probability variation flag has changed from on to off (YES in step S3403), peripheral control MPU 414a executes a pseudo effect as the current variation effect (step S3404). After that, this processing ends. The pseudo effect includes, for example, an effect in which the movable accessory (door) operates to cover the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the start of fluctuation, and returns to the origin when the fluctuation stops.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag has not changed from on to off (NO in step S3403), the peripheral control MPU 414a executes the normal effect as the current variation effect because it is not the state transition timing (step S3405). After that, this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag at the start of fluctuation, and sends a state designation command to the peripheral control board 4010. Therefore, when shifting from the rush mode to the normal mode (when the display target of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed with the shift of the game mode), the variation of the second special symbol at the ST last time (70th time) is: The peripheral control board 4010 determines that the fluctuation is in the normal mode, and when the liquid crystal display device 1900 originally displays it, it is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920.

Therefore, in the pseudo effect process of the present embodiment, the pseudo effect is executed by the change when the state is changed. This solves a problem that may occur due to the difference between the game mode in which the variation is to be executed and the game mode in the internal control. There is no problem in the pseudo effect as long as the effect does not give the player a feeling of strangeness due to the difference in the game mode. Further, the determination of the state transition on the side of the peripheral control board 4010 is performed by the processing of steps S3401 to S3403 by the state designation command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of fluctuation, but the determination is not limited to this. When the probability state and the time saving state are changed, a state transition instruction command may be separately set in the main control board 4100 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. In this case, the peripheral control board 4010 side can determine the state transition based on whether or not the state transition instruction command is received.

[Timing chart of state transition control]
FIG. 201(A) is a timing chart for explaining the conventional game mode shift, and FIGS. 201(B) and 201(C) are timing charts for explaining the game mode shift and the pseudo effect of the third embodiment.

FIG. 201(A) shows a case of shifting from the rush preparation mode to the normal mode by the conventional ST number exhaustion. Conventionally, the probability change flag and the time saving flag were changed and the state transitioned at the time of fluctuation stop on the first special symbol side of the ST last time (ST=0). Therefore, in the rush preparation mode, when the deviation variation on the first special symbol side of the ST last time (ST=0) is started, under the situation that the variation on the second special symbol side is not executed, the first special symbol When the variation on the second special symbol side is started during the deviation variation on the symbol side, the variation on the second special symbol side is determined as a big hit in the probability variation state.

If the first special symbol side is not a deviation variation but a winning variation, the variation started during the relevant variation will be a deviation in the non-lottery, so a variation determined as a big hit with high probability after ST digestion does not occur. .. Moreover, when the deviation variation of the first special symbol side is started, if the variation of the second special symbol side is being executed, the change will be changed when the variation that was being executed on the second special symbol side is stopped. Since the flag is turned off, there is no fluctuation that is determined as a big hit with high probability after ST digestion.

On the other hand, FIG. 201(B) shows a case where the rush preparation mode is shifted to the normal mode by the ST count exhaustion of the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are changed at the start of variation on the first special symbol side of the ST last time (ST=0), and the state shifts. Therefore, in the rush preparation mode, when the deviation variation on the first special symbol side of the ST last time (ST=0) is started, under the situation that the variation on the second special symbol side is not executed, the first special symbol Even if the variation on the second special symbol side is started during the deviation variation on the symbol side, the variation on the second special symbol side will be determined as a big hit in the normal state (low probability state).

Here, since the peripheral control board 4010 receives the state designation command at the time when the fluctuation in the rush preparation mode (probability change state) is started, it is commanded that the game mode is shifted to the normal mode (normal state) at the start of the fluctuation. To analyze. Therefore, when the effect selection table is provided for each mode, the effect is selected from the effect selection table (not shown) corresponding to the normal mode, although the effect is originally in the rush preparation mode (probability change state). As a result, there is a new concern that the presentation may feel strange.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation on the first special symbol side of the ST last time (ST=0), that is, the variation at the time of mode transition, is not the normal effect determined based on the command received at the start of variation, but the state transition. A pseudo effect is performed in consideration of the timing. This eliminates a problem caused by the state transition control on the main control board 4100 side.

FIG. 201C shows a case where the rush mode is shifted to the normal mode by the ST number of times of the present embodiment. In this embodiment, similarly to FIG. 201(B), the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are changed at the start of the variation on the second special symbol side in the ST last time (ST=0), and the state shifts. Then, the peripheral control board 4010 receives the state designation command at the time when the fluctuation in the rush mode (probability change state) is started, and therefore analyzes the command when the game mode is shifted to the normal mode (normal state) at the start of the fluctuation. ..

Here, in the rush mode and the normal mode, the special symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is different. Therefore, the variation on the second special symbol side of the ST last time is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the rush mode, but is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 in the normal mode. The switching of the display (the liquid crystal display device 1900, the 7-segment display 1920) before the end of the ST last variation may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a problem caused by the state transition control on the main control board 4100 side by performing the pseudo effect with the variation on the second special symbol side of the ST last time (ST=0), that is, the variation during the mode transition. To eliminate.

<Effect of state transition control>
According to the state transition control of the third embodiment, when one variation that is not the probability variation target occurs during execution of one variation that is the probability variation target, the other variation is prevented from being jackpot-lotted with a high probability state. When one of the fluctuations starts, the probability change state is ended and the state transition is performed. As a result, in the game mode in which the probability variation function is added, it is possible to make a determination in the high-probability state only for an appropriate number of changes. In addition, in the fluctuation of the probability change target that has undergone the state transition at the start of the fluctuation, a pseudo effect is executed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable due to the difference between the game mode corresponding to the fluctuation and the game mode in the internal control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a trouble due to the state transition (the early transition of the game mode) at the start of the variation of the probability variation target.

<ST display control>
Further, when the game mode shifts to the rush preparation mode (high-accuracy time/short state) and the rush mode (high-accuracy non-time/short state), the number of STs is given 70 times. In the rush preparation mode, the game on the first special symbol side is recommended, and in the rush mode, the game on the second special symbol side is recommended. Therefore, it is preferable that the number of STs given at the time of shifting to each game mode is consumed by the recommended game.

By the way, in the rush preparation mode and the rush mode, it is recommended that the player wins a game ball into the special winning opening 2101b and the second starting opening 2102 of the first starting opening 2101 by "right hitting". In the rush preparation mode, there is a possibility that a game ball that has not won the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 will win the second starting opening 2102 on the downstream side. In the rush mode, the game mode before the transition (normal mode or rush preparation mode) recommends winning the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (permanent winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b). There is a possibility that the pending change (upper limit of 4) of the first special symbol may remain.

Therefore, it is difficult to use only the variation on the special symbol side that recommends the number of STs to be given in each game mode. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous variation state are controlled so that when one variation derives a hit, the other is deviated, so even if two special symbols are in the simultaneous variation state, ST There is a concern that the interest of the game will be deteriorated if the number of times is quickly digested.

In the present embodiment, in the game mode in which the probability variation function is given by the number of STs, the ST number display control that focuses on the ST number display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that can be visually recognized by the player and that suppresses the decline in the interest of the game is performed. To do. As an example, it is displayed as if the ST number that is a predetermined number smaller than the ST number that is actually given is given, and the predetermined number is triggered when the ST number subtracted according to the number of times of variation reaches the first specified number. The effect (adjustment effect) as if the ST number of minutes was additionally given is executed. The ST display control of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203.

[ST count display processing]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ST count display process in the third embodiment. The ST number display processing is one of the effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU 414a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a state transition instruction command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3501). Here, the state transition instruction command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 when the state of the probability flag or the time saving flag is changed. The state transition instruction command is transmitted when the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is set to the on state due to a big hit, or when the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is set to the off state due to ST count exhaustion.

When the peripheral control MPU 414a receives the state transition instruction command (YES in step S3501), the peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the probability change is added (step S3502). That is, it is determined whether or not the state transition is triggered by the big hit when the probability variation flag is set to the on state. Then, when the probability change is not added (NO in step S3502), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the probability variation is given (YES in step S3502), the peripheral control MPU 414a subtracts or adds the ST number given in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and displays it (step S3503). In the example of FIG. 203 described later, a predetermined number of 5 times is subtracted from the actual ST number of 70 times, which is displayed as 65 times.

If the state control instruction command has not been received (NO in step S3501), the peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of variation is received. (Step S3504). When the variation pattern command is received (YES in step S3504), it is determined whether the ST counter value is greater than 0 (step S3505). Note that a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of fluctuation may be applied instead of the fluctuation pattern command. Further, the ST counter value may be information included in the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, or the peripheral control board 4010 side may subtract and count the number of fluctuations after the mode transition from the given ST number. Good. If the variation pattern command has not been received (NO in step S3504) or the ST counter value is 0 (NO in step S3505), this processing ends.

When the ST counter value is greater than 0, that is, in the probability change state (YES in step S3505), peripheral control MPU 414a displays the ST counter value of liquid crystal display device 1900 by subtracting 1 (step S3506). After that, it is determined whether or not the displayed ST counter value has reached the first specified number (here, 5) (step S3507). Here, if the ST counter value has not reached the first specified number (NO in step S3507), this processing is terminated, and subtraction display is repeated until the ST counter value reaches the first specified number.

When the ST counter value reaches the first specified number (here, 5) (YES in step S3507), peripheral control MPU 414a displays the actual number of STs in the internal control and liquid crystal display device 1900. An adjustment effect is executed so as to obtain consistency with the ST counter value (step S3508). After that, this processing ends. The adjustment effect is an effect of accelerating the subtraction of the ST counter value or giving the insufficient number of times in order to match the timing when both values become 0 (zero).

[Timing chart of ST display control]
FIG. 203 is a timing chart illustrating ST display control in the liquid crystal display device of the third embodiment. Here, a case where a transition to the rush mode is triggered by a big hit of the first special symbol that occurs during the rush preparation mode will be described as an example.

First, the probability variation flag is set to the ON state at the end of the big hit game of the first special symbol that occurred during the rush preparation mode, and the number of STs of 70 times is given. At this time, the main control board 4100 transmits to the peripheral control board 4010 a state transition instruction command indicating transition to the rush mode. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player is informed and displayed as if the number "65" of subtracting the predetermined number "5" from the number of grants "70" is given based on the state transition instruction command. Here, 65 times is calculated as the number of fluctuations that can be executed in the probability variation state, which is the variation of the second special symbol recommended by the rush mode. The predetermined number "5" was subtracted as the number of times the first special symbol changed.

Immediately after entering the rush mode, the fluctuation of the first special symbol held in the rush preparation mode will be executed. At this time, although the ST number is quickly consumed due to the execution of the variation of the second special symbol recommended by the rush mode, when the ST number displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 reaches the first prescribed number “5”, the adjustment effect is produced. Is performed, and an effect as if the ST number of the predetermined number “5” that was initially subtracted is additionally given is performed. In this way, since it is possible to make the player think that the ST number has been added when the ST number has been exhausted in the rush mode, it is possible to prevent the series of rush modes from deteriorating.

Note that, in one example, the number of STs displayed first is displayed by subtracting a predetermined number from the number of STs actually given, but it may be added. In the rush preparation mode, the variation of the second special symbol may periodically occur due to the structural arrangement relationship between the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, contrary to the example described above, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays as if the number "90", which is the predetermined number (for example, "20") added to the number of STs actually given first, is added. Then, a plurality of stipulated numbers are provided as an opportunity to perform the adjustment effect. For example, when the first prescribed number “70”, the second prescribed number “50”, and the third prescribed number “20” are reached, a predetermined adjustment period is set, and one variation is performed a plurality of times during this adjustment period. Perform an effect (adjustment effect) that looks like fluctuations. At this time, the subtraction number of the ST number per change is changed so that the difference between the actual ST number and the display number is gradually reduced as the ST number is exhausted. By such display control, the player feels that a large number of STs are being digested at a good tempo, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the series of rush preparation modes.

<Effect of ST display control>
According to the ST display control of the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 4010 displays a number of times different from the ST number given by the main control board 4100 on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Then, when the game mode to which the probability variation function is added ends, adjustment effects (subtraction acceleration, number of times addition, etc.) are executed during the game mode so that the matching is matched. This makes it possible to diversify the ST number of digestive effects in the game mode and enhance the interest of the game. Then, since the interest in the ST number being exhausted due to the fluctuation of the special symbol which is not recommended in the game mode is diminished, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

(Fourth Embodiment)
The pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above. In the fourth embodiment, a basic control pattern (second embodiment) in which a variation of the other that occurs earlier causes the variation of the other to shift in the non-selection lottery (second embodiment) and the variation of two variations A simultaneous variation control structure having a control pattern in which a variation having an advantageous result is prioritized and the other variation is forcibly removed as a priority control pattern (second embodiment). It is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the game by taking as an example a game machine having a game area (see FIG. 204) in which the arrangement of (the universal figure gate 2301 and the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101) is different from the above-described embodiments. The possible game control and effect control will be described. Specifically, regarding game control, not only the occurrence of the first big hit B (without probable time saving) but also the first big hit A (with probable time saving) at the time of transition to the high probability non-time saving state (rush mode) Including multiple occurrences of (reaching the time limit). Regarding the effect control, in the round game, it is possible to execute an effect that reflects the taste of the player.

[Game board]
FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. Members having the same functions as those of the game board 4 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 114) and the game board 4 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 152) described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Here, a characteristic configuration of the game board 4 of the fourth embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the universal figure gate 2301 is arranged in the game area on the left side of the center character 2500, and the first start is directly below the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 provided in the lower area of the center character 2500. A special winning opening 2101b of the opening 2101 is provided. In addition, the movable prize (ordinary electric prize) 2111 for converting the special prize hole 2101b into a state in which the game ball can easily win (open state) and a state in which the game ball cannot win (closed state) is the permanent prize hole 2101a. It is provided directly below and has the same function as that of the second embodiment. Therefore, when the game state is the high-probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), the player is urged to "left hit". Further, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is a combia-tacker device (see FIG. 153(A)) arranged at the same position as in the second embodiment.

Thus, the game board 4 of the present embodiment, the game board 4 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 114) and the game board 4 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 152) described above are the universal gate 2301 and Since the arrangement of the 1 start opening 2101 and the special winning opening 2101b is different, the difference is that the game area which the player should aim and hit in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode) is the left game area of the center role object 2500. However, other game characteristics (recommended game mode transition, recommended winning hole in the game mode) are the same.

[Game outline]
FIG. 205 is a diagram showing a transition of a game state (game mode) of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 206 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the fourth embodiment. is there. The game mode transition and the game spec of this embodiment are based on the game mode transition (see FIG. 147) and the game spec (see FIG. 146) of the first embodiment described above. Here, features different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 205, in the highly accurate short time state (rush preparation mode) of the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the highly accurate non-time saving state (rush mode) upon the occurrence of the first big hit B or the first big hit A2. At the same time, the first big hit A (A1 or A2) can be shifted to a highly accurate non-time saving state (rush mode) when a plurality of big hits occur. As will be described later in detail, the first big hit A of the present embodiment is provided with two types of symbols A1 and A2. In the low probability non-time saving state (normal mode), both the first jackpot A1 and A2 are provided with the probability changing function and the time reducing function, but in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), only the first jackpot A1 is changed. The time saving function is added, only the probability variation function is applied to the first big hit A2, and the time saving function is not applied. In the high-probability non-time saving state (rush preparation mode), only the probability variation function is given to both the first big hits A1 and A2, and the time saving function is not given.

In the present embodiment, as described above in the first embodiment, the game of the second special symbol in the highly accurate non-time saving state (rush mode) is a privilege game in which a prize ball can be obtained, so the player enters the rush mode. Expect. Therefore, not only the big hit (the first big hit B in the normal mode, the first big hit A2/B in the rush preparation mode) that does not activate the time saving function is generated, but also other big hits (the first big hit A in the normal mode and the first big hit A in the rush preparation mode). By making a plurality of one-big hits A1) occur as a trigger to shift to the rush mode, the chance of entering the rush mode, which is advantageous to the player, is expanded, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 206(C), this embodiment is characterized by a big hit spec. As described above, in the first special symbol lottery, the first jackpot A is provided with two types of symbols A1 and A2. The big hit of the symbol A1 (first big hit A1) is the same as the first big hit A of the previous embodiments in that the time saving function is added when the player wins in any game state, but the big hit of the symbol A2 ( The first big hit A2) is characterized in that the time saving function is given only in the case of winning in the low probability non-time saving state. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving limit function is set as one of the operation stop conditions in the game state in which the time saving function operates (rush preparation mode). The time saving limit function executes a process of stopping the operation of the time saving function (“YES” in step S962 of FIG. 211 described later) when the jackpot that continues the operation of the time saving function reaches a predetermined number (three times). Therefore, the predetermined number of times is set as a time saving limit number. Although the first jackpot A (A1 or A2) that triggers the entry of the time saving state (rush preparation mode) is counted as one time, the time saving limit number of the present embodiment is not limited to this.

Further, in the first special symbol lottery, the distribution ratios of the first big hit A1, the first big hit A2, and the first big hit B are set to 25%, 25%, and 50%, respectively. In the present embodiment, since the first big hit A2 in which the working ability of the time saving function is different according to the probability state is provided, each game mode entry probability is different according to the probability state. When the probability state is the normal state (normal mode), the probability of entering the high-probability time-shortening state (rush preparation mode) is 50%, but again in the high-probability time-shortening state (rush preparation mode) after the entry There is a 25% chance of rushing into. In other words, the high probability non-time saving state (rush mode) entry probability in the low probability non-time saving state (normal mode) is 50%, and the rush mode entry probability in the rush preparation mode is 75%.

In addition, all jackpots of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, 100% of the probability to shift the gaming state after the big hit game to the probability change state, the probability variation state of the special symbols after the big hit game It is provided so as to be able to add a probability variation function that continues until the number of times is executed 165 times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 206(E), in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the variation of the second special symbol is suppressed in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. The long-term fluctuation is 600 seconds to 3300 seconds.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state (normal mode), by aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a game ball is shot (so-called “left hit”), so that the first starting opening 2101 It is the best game method for the player to always give a game ball to the winning hole 2101a. Therefore, when the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the regular winning opening 2101a is the first big hit A (A1 or A2), the gaming state is highly accurate with the probability changing function and the time saving function. It shifts to the time saving game state (rush preparation mode). In the high-accuracy-time short game state (rush preparation mode), a game ball is shot (so-called “left hit”) by aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the game ball passes through the universal gate 2301. It is the best game method for the player to aim at the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the regular winning opening 2101a or the special winning opening 2101b is the first big hit B or the first big hit A2, only the probability changing function is given to the gaming state. High-precision non-time saving game state (rush mode). Further, since the present embodiment is provided with the time saving limit function, the first big hit A occurs three times including the first big hit A (A1 or A2) which becomes a mode entry trigger during the rush preparation mode. Even in this case, the gaming state will shift to the highly accurate non-time saving gaming state (rush mode). In the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), a game ball is shot (so-called “right hit”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, thereby winning the second starting opening 2102. Aiming at is the best playing method for the player. For all the big hits that occur in the rush mode, the number of STs is reset to 165 and the current game state (rush mode) is continued. In the rush preparation mode and the rush mode, when the variation of 165 times ends without a new big hit, the game state shifts to the normal game state (normal mode).

[Control pattern]
FIG. 207 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a control pattern of the simultaneous variable control structure according to the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, a control pattern that combines the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern in the second embodiment described above is executed. Specifically, a basic control pattern (second embodiment and third embodiment) in which a non-lottery period is provided in which one variation that occurs first causes the other variation to shift in non-lottery, and two variations It is a combination with a priority control pattern (second embodiment) in which one of the fluctuations that gives a favorable result to the player is prioritized and the other fluctuation is forcibly excluded.

As shown in FIG. 207, when the variation of the first special symbol that occurs earlier derives the big hit, the forced off flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state at the same timing as the big hit determination. As a result, even if a variation in the second special symbol occurs, it is displaced in the non-lottery due to the forced detachment flag. Then, the variation of the second special symbol shifts and stops at the variation stop timing of the first special symbol.

Further, when the variation of the second special symbol that occurs earlier derives a small hit, the forced disengagement flag of the first special symbol is not set to the on state even if it is a hit. Later, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol becomes the simultaneous fluctuation state, priority determination processing is executed, and the priority fluctuation is determined. Here, when the variation of the first special symbol that derives the big hit during the variation of the second special symbol is started, the priority determination process is performed and the variation of the first special symbol that derives the big hit is prioritized. Decided. Thereby, the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends, the small hit result is replaced with the off result by the forced off flag, and the stop is stopped.

<Main control>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208A to 214. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the same state transition control as in the above-described third embodiment is performed. Specifically, the stop timing (state transition timing) of the probability changing function accompanying the ST number of times is exhausted at the start of the 165th variation. The control pattern of the simultaneous variable control structure of the third embodiment adopts the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. Below, the changed part will be described based on the processing of the third embodiment described above.

In the present embodiment, with respect to each processing in the first special symbol control processing (FIG. 126), a first fluctuation start processing (FIGS. 208A and 208B) described later, a first fluctuation pattern setting processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 128), a first changing process (FIG. 210) described later, a first big hit game start process (FIG. 130) of the first embodiment, a first big hit game process (FIG. 211) described later, and a first interlocking setting process described later. (FIG. 213) is executed. Similarly, for each process in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134), the second variation start process (FIGS. 214A and 214B) described later, the second variation pattern setting process (FIG. 136) of the first embodiment, which will be described later. Second fluctuation processing (FIG. 216), second big hit game start processing (FIG. 138) of the first embodiment, second big hit game processing (FIG. 217) described later, second small hit game start of the first embodiment The process (FIG. 140), the second small hit game process (FIG. 198) of the third embodiment, and the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 218) described later are executed.

[First fluctuation start processing]
208A and 208B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the first variation start process in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the first fluctuation start process (FIGS. 193A and 193B) in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the first priority determination process between the hit determination process of step S307a and the determination result information setting process of step S308a (step S341a). In the first priority determination process, a process of determining the variation of the special symbol to be prioritized is performed from the determination result in the hit determination process of step S307a and the game situation on the second special symbol side. Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 209. In the third embodiment (FIG. 193A), the forced off flag of the second special symbol is set from the hit determination result in the processing of steps S313a and S314a, but in the present embodiment, the first priority determination processing ( This is performed in step S341a). Therefore, after the processing of step S308a, the processing shifts to the processing of step S331a and subsequent steps.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of resetting the counter value of the time saving limit to 0 after the process of step S335a (step S342a). This embodiment is provided with a time saving limit function, and the time saving limit counter is counted up in the time saving function setting process (step S762a) executed at the end of the big hit game. The process of step S342a is executed when the operation of the time saving function is stopped by the exhaustion of ST times.

[First priority determination processing]
FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first priority determination processing in the fourth embodiment. The same processes as those of the first priority determination process (FIG. 168) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the result of the above-described first special symbol hit determination process (step S307a) is a big hit (step S371a). Then, if the determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit (YES in step S371a), the compulsory disengagement flag of the second special symbol is set to ON (step S372a), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (NO in step S371a), the main control MPU 4100a executes the same process as that in the second embodiment (steps S361a to S367a).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first variation start process (FIGS. 208A and 208B) described above, when the first special symbol is not in the lottery period in which no lottery occurs (NO in the process of step S311a). , First priority determination processing is executed. Then, in the first priority determination process (FIG. 209), when the variation of the first special symbol is a big hit, a non-lottery period is set when the second special symbol is out of the lottery, and when it is not a big hit. When the second special symbol is changing, the process of giving priority to the change which gives an advantageous result to the player is executed.

[Processing during first fluctuation]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first changing process in the fourth embodiment. The first changing process of the present embodiment is based on the first changing process (FIG. 194) of the third embodiment, and includes steps S551a and S551a of the first changing process (FIG. 169) of the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The process of S552a is added. Since this process is a combination of the above-described first changing process and the same process, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

[First big hit game processing]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first big hit game process in the fourth embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st big hit game process (FIG. 158) in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, as each process for ending the big hit game, the probability change flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery after the big hit game is in a high probability state (probability change state) The state is set to 165 times in the number of special symbol lottery (the number of STs) to make the high probability state (step S761a). Next, the time saving function setting processing in which the control relating to the time saving limit function is added to the conventional time saving function setting processing (FIG. 132) is executed (step S762a). These processes are the configuration peculiar to this embodiment. The details of the time saving function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Time-saving function setting process]
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving function setting process in the fourth embodiment. Note that the processing common to the time saving function setting processing (FIG. 132) in the first embodiment is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is the big hit this time is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function (YES in step S751), and the current (at the time of big hit determination) game mode is not the rush mode. In this case (NO in step S752), the time saving function is activated to bring the game state into the time saving state. Therefore, first, the counter value of the time saving limit is updated by 1 (step S761). Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving limit has reached 3 (time saving limit number of times) (step S762). If the counter value has not reached 3 (NO in step S762), the time saving flag is turned on to activate the time saving function (step S753). After that, this processing ends.

As a result, the counter value of the time saving limit increases every time the first big hit A1 occurs continuously in the time saving state (rush preparation mode) in which the time saving function is activated. That is, the process of step S761 described above is a number counting means for counting the number of times the first big hit A1 is generated. Then, when the counter value reaches 3 (the number of time saving limits) (YES in step S762), the main control MPU 4100a saves time by reaching the number of time saving limits even if the present big hit is the first big hit A1. By not operating the function, it becomes possible to shift the gaming state to the highly accurate non-time saving state (rush mode).

The main control MPU 4100a resets the counter value of the time saving limit to 0 when the time saving function is not activated due to the big hit this time (NO in step S751, YES in step S752, YES in step S762). (Step S763), the present process ends. In this way, when a big hit (a big hit other than the first big hit A1, for example, a first big hit X in Modification 2 described later) that does not activate the time saving function occurs, the count value of the time saving limit that has been counted until now is 0. Is reset (initialization of the number counting means). The process (shift inhibiting means) of step S763, which is executed after the determination of NO in step S751 in the rush preparation mode, inhibits the transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, and the type of jackpot that occurs is also important. Because of this, the interest in games will increase.

[First interlocking setting process]
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the fourth embodiment. The first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment is based on the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 195) of the third embodiment, and steps S1111a of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 170) of the priority control pattern of the second embodiment and The process of S1112a is added. Since this process is a combination of the same processes as the first interlocking setting process described above, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
214A and 214B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the second variation start processing in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the second fluctuation start process (FIGS. 196A and 196B) in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the second priority determination process between the hit determination process of step S307b and the determination result information setting process of step S308b (step S341b). In the second priority determination process, a process of determining the variation of the special symbol to be prioritized from the determination result in the hit determination process of step S307b and the game situation on the first special symbol side is performed. Details of the second priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215. In the third embodiment (FIG. 196A), the forced off flag of the first special symbol is set from the hit determination result in the processing of steps S313b and S314b, but in the present embodiment, the second priority determination processing ( This is performed in step S341b). Therefore, after the processing of step S308b, the processing shifts to the processing of step S331b and subsequent steps.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a executes processing of resetting the counter value of the time saving limit to 0 after the processing of step S335b (step S342b). This embodiment has a time saving limit function, and the time saving limit counter is counted up in the time saving function setting process (step S762b) executed at the end of the big hit game. The process of step S342b is executed when the operation of the time saving function is stopped by the ST number of times.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second priority determination processing in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that processes common to the second priority determination process (FIG. 172) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the determination result of the above-described second special symbol hit determination process (step S307b) is a big hit (step S371b). Then, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit (YES in step S371b), the compulsory disengagement flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (step S372b), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (NO in step S371b), the main control MPU 4100a executes the same process as that in the second embodiment (steps S361b to S367b).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the above-described second variation start process (FIGS. 214A and 214B), when the second special symbol is not in the lottery period in which there is a deviation in the lottery (NO in the process of step S311b). ), the second priority determination process is executed. Then, in the second priority determination process (FIG. 215), when the variation of the second special symbol is a big hit, a non-lottery period in which the first special symbol is shifted in the non-lottery is set, and when it is not a big hit. In the case where the first special symbol is fluctuating, a process of giving priority to a fluctuation that gives an advantageous result to the player is executed.

[Processing during second fluctuation]
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second changing process in the fourth embodiment. The second changing process in the present embodiment is based on the second changing process (FIG. 197) in the third embodiment, and includes step S551b of the second changing process (FIG. 173) in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The process of S552b is added. Since this processing is a combination of the same processing as the above-described second changing processing, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

[Second jackpot game processing]
FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second big hit game process in the fourth embodiment. In addition, about the process common with the 2nd big hit game process (FIG. 161) in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and description is abbreviate|omitted.

The main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, as each process for ending the big hit game, the probability change flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery after the big hit game is in a high probability state (probability change state) The state is set to 165 times in the number of special symbol lottery (ST number) to make the high probability state (step S761b). Next, the time saving function setting processing in which the control relating to the time saving limit function is added to the conventional time saving function setting processing (FIG. 132) is executed (step S762b). These processes are the configuration peculiar to this embodiment. The details of the time saving function setting process are as described in FIG.

[Second linked setting process]
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the fourth embodiment. The second interlocking setting process of this embodiment is based on the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 199) of the third embodiment, and the step S1111b of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 174) of the priority control pattern of the second embodiment and The process of S1112b is added. Since this process is a combination of processes common to the above-described second interlocking setting process, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

<Direction control>
[Round effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220, effect control in the fourth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, it is possible to provide an effect according to the player's preference in the big hit game. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the round effect setting process in the fourth embodiment. The round effect setting process is one of the effect control process (step S3102) and the sound control process (step S3103) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition in the big hit game.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether or not a big hit start command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3601). The big hit start command is the number of rounds according to the kind of big hit, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum in the first big hit game process (step S704a of FIG. 211) or the second big hit game process (step S704b of FIG. 217) described above. It is set to include information such as the number of winnings. When the big hit start command has not been received (NO in step S3601), the process proceeds to step S3604 described later. In this process, first, the game effect of the first round (initial effect) is set in the processes of steps S3601 to S3603.

When the jackpot start command is received (YES in step S3601), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the initial effect of the jackpot game based on the game information up to this point (the number of consecutive games for the jackpot, the previously selected song, etc.). Yes (step S3602). The big hit game consists of a plurality of round games corresponding to the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 is repeated. In the present embodiment, the initial effect is an effect in the first round game (display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1900, songs output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc.).

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a selection operation reception period during which the player can select an effect by operating the operation means (step S3603), and ends this processing. Here, the selection operation acceptance period is set in the first round game (initial effect), and at this time, as shown in FIG. 220(A), a display prompting the player to perform a selection operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Be seen. Specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to notify that the song (song A or music B) to be played in the round game after the second round can be selected. In the round game of the first round, the song A flows, and a display (the sea at night) showing the image of the song A is displayed on the screen.

Next, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not receive the big hit start command (NO in step S3601), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the selection operation reception period is set in the process of step S3603 described above ( Step S3604). Then, if it is not within the selection operation acceptance period (NO in step S3604), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is during the selection operation acceptance period (YES in step S3604), the game effects (subsequent effects) for the second and subsequent rounds are set in the processes in step S3605 and subsequent steps.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not there is a valid operation input during the selection operation reception period (step S3605). Here, the operation input of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 detected during the selection operation reception period in which the player can select a song in the first round game is regarded as a valid operation input.

If there is a valid operation input (YES in step S3605), peripheral control MPU 4140a selects an effect based on the operation input (step S3606), and determines whether the selected effect is the same as the initial effect. It is determined (step S3607). Specifically, the song (song A) played in the first round game is the same as the song (song A or song B) selected by the player as the song to be played in the second and subsequent round games. Determine whether there is.

If the selected effect and the initial effect are the same (YES in step S3607), peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the continuation of the initial effect as the subsequent effect for the second and subsequent rounds (step S3608). After that, this processing ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(B1), the song (song A) and the display pattern (sea of the night) being played in the first round game are also continued in the second round game. It is possible to provide an unnatural feeling by playing the continuation of the song from the position where the time required for the initial effect (predetermined time) has elapsed without returning the song to the beginning in the second round.

On the other hand, when the selected effect is not the same as the initial effect (NO in step S3607), peripheral control MPU 4140a performs setting to start the effect selected as the effect of the second and subsequent rounds from the beginning (step S3609). After that, this processing ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220 (B2), in the second round game, a song (song B) is newly played from the beginning of the song, and the screen is displayed in the image of the song B (sunny sky). The display can be switched.

If there is no valid operation input (NO in step S3605), the peripheral control MPU 4140a plays the song played in the first round game (initial production) as the subsequent production for the second and subsequent rounds. The process is started from the beginning, that is, the initial effect is repeated (step S3610), and this process ends. Note that, as a subsequent production, a setting may be made to end the production of the song in the initial production. Further, as the process of step S3610, the initial effect in the first round game may be continued as it is, similarly to the process of step S3608.

In this way, in the round game, by making it possible to perform an effect that reflects the player's preference, it is possible to direct the interest that was only directed to winning the game ball to the special winning opening 2103, The interest of the game can be raised. Further, since the initial effect in the round game is set based on the game information up to that point, the interest of the game can be further enhanced. Further, when the player selects the same effect as the effect at the time of the initial effect, the effect is continuously executed after the second round. Even if the player selects the same effect as the initial effect because it suits the taste, if the effect temporarily stops at the end of one round and is repeated again from the beginning of the effect at the start of the second round, the player feels strange. May be given to the player, or the rhythm may be disturbed and the player may be offended. Here, by continuing the effect that was being executed in the first round, it is possible to suppress the feeling of strangeness and the disorder of the rhythm.

(Effects of Fourth Embodiment)
According to the fourth embodiment, in the low-probability non-time saving state (normal mode) and the high-probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), the high probability time saving state (rush time) is triggered by the first jackpot to which the probability variation function and the time saving function are given. It shifts to the preparation mode), and the probability change function is added, but the time saving function is not added. The first big hit triggers a high probability non-time saving state (rush mode, specific mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the rush preparation mode. In a gaming machine capable of performing the probability change function and the time saving function, the first big hit occurs a plurality of times (reaching the time saving limit) also triggers the transition to the rush mode. Since the expected value for transition to the rush mode can be increased by the occurrence of the first big hit, the player's discouragement due to not winning the first big hit that directly shifts to the rush mode by one occurrence is reduced. can do. Further, since the means for shifting to the rush mode is increased, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Here, when the rush preparation mode in which the time saving function operates is entered from the normal mode, the time saving limit is activated. In the time saving limit activation state, the first big hit A (A1 or A2) that triggers the entry into the rush preparation mode is counted as once, and the first big hit A1 generated during the rush preparation mode is added and counted. Then, when the counter value reaches the predetermined number of time saving limits (3), the rush mode is entered. At this time, the rush mode rush probability at the time of the big hit varies depending on the number of times (counter value) of the first big hit to which the probability varying function and the time saving function are given. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206(C), the first time is in the normal mode, 50%, the second time is in the rush preparation mode, 75%, and the third time is the rush mode entry probability of 100% due to reaching the time limit number of times. Become. Further, if the number of times of occurrence of the first big hit to which the probability variation function and the time saving function are added increases, the number of times of shortening approaches the number of times, so that the rush mode entry expected value rises along with the rush mode entry probability at each occurrence of the big hit. In this way, the probability of plunging into the rush mode and the expected plunge value increase with each occurrence of the first big hit to which the probability varying function and the time-saving function are added, thus increasing the player's willingness to continue playing and the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, once the rush mode is entered, the rush mode is continued in any of the big hits (with the probability changing function and without the time saving function), and the rush mode is repeated until the ST number is exhausted (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). Unlike the rush preparation mode, the mode does not end when the time limit is reached. As a result, if the player enters the rush mode, a certain game value (opportunity for winning a prize ball) can be provided, so that the value (the degree of advantage) of the rush mode can be further increased. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the round game, the initial effect based on the game information up to that time is executed in the first round, and it is possible to execute the effect reflecting the taste of the player in the second round and thereafter, The interest that was only directed to winning the game ball to the special winning opening 2103 can be directed to the production, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, when the player selects the same effect as the initial effect, the initial effect is continued even after the second round, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player an uncomfortable feeling or a rhythm disturbance due to the effect switching. You can

(Modification 1)
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the probability of plunging into the rush mode increases as the number of times the first big hit (time saving big hit) to which the probability variation function and the time saving function are applied is increased in the time saving limit activated state. On the other hand, in the first modification, the probability that the first occurrence of the short-time jackpot is much higher than that of the second occurrence is higher than that of the second time. The first modification will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 221 is a view for explaining characteristic game specifications of the modified example 1 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 221(A) is a table showing the change of the mode distribution ratio in the time saving limit activated state of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 221(B) is the table of the mode distribution ratio in the time reduced limit activated state of the first modification. FIG. 221(C) is a table showing the transition, and FIG. 221(C) is an example of a table showing the winning probabilities of the normal symbols of the first modification.

As shown in FIG. 221(A), in the above-described fourth embodiment, the rush mode entry probability at the time of a big hit increases as the number of times (counter value) of occurrence of a short time big hit increases. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 221(B), in the modification 1, the rush mode entry probability at the time of the first time saving/hits (when entering the rush preparation mode from the normal mode) is 50%, whereas The probability of rush mode entry at the time of the second short-time jackpot is 1%. In this way, the distribution ratio of the first big hit B in the normal mode (a big hit to which the probability variation function is added but not the time saving function, and a big hit without time saving) is set to 50%, and the first big hit B and the first big hit in the rush preparation mode. By setting the distribution ratio of A2 (a big hit without time saving) to 1%, the game is focused on winning the first big hit B for the first time in the normal mode. If the first big hit in the normal mode is not the first big hit B, almost no big hit can be expected in the rush preparation mode, and the only way to reach the rush mode is to reach the time limit number of hits. In the first modification, the number of time saving limits is set to 3. Therefore, when the third time saving/hit hit occurs, the rush preparation mode enters the rush mode with a probability of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 221(C), in the normal symbol lottery of the modified example 1, both probabilities are set so that the player cannot distinguish between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. Specifically, in the case of a non-time saving state in which the time saving function is not provided, the probability of winning per universal figure is won with a probability of 1/200. Also, in the case of the time saving state in which the time saving function is provided, the probability of winning is 1/199 per universal figure. In this way, the time saving state is set to a state in which it cannot be distinguished from the non-time saving state (fine time saving state).

(Effect of Modification 1)
According to the modified example 1 of the fourth embodiment, unless the first big hit B in the normal mode is the first big hit B, the first big hit B and the first big hit A2 (big hit without time saving) can hardly be expected in the rush preparation mode. Since there is no choice but to reach the time limit number of times in the rush mode entry, it is possible to provide a game play with a possibility of entering the rush mode depending on the strength. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, by setting the time saving state of the modified example 1 to a minute time saving state that is indistinguishable from a non-time saving state, the payout adjustment becomes easy. Further, by making it impossible for the player to distinguish whether or not the big hit in the time saving state (rush preparation mode) in which the time saving limit function is activated is short, the player is not made too aware of the time saving limit number of times. By setting a minute time saving state so that attention does not concentrate on how many more times to achieve the time saving limit number of times, in the time saving state (rush preparation mode) Can draw attention.

(Modification 2)
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the probability change function of the number of STs (165 times) is added to all jackpots, and the normal mode is entered when the ST number is exhausted. On the other hand, in the modified example 2, the normal big hit (first big hit X) to which the probability changing function and the time saving function are not provided is set, and the shift to the normal mode occurs when the winning of the normal big hit occurs. Modification 2 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223.

FIG. 222 is a view for explaining characteristic game specifications of Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(A), when the jackpot of the symbol X (first jackpot X, second jackpot X) is won in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the probability changing function and the time saving function are It is a "normal time saving" big hit that is not given. From the fourth embodiment, the jackpot type distribution ratio is changed. The jackpot distribution ratios of the symbol A1, the symbol A2, the symbol B and the symbol X in the first special symbol lottery are 20%, 44%, 18% and 18%, respectively. The jackpot distribution ratios of the symbol A, the symbol B, and the symbol X in the second special symbol lottery are 62%, 20%, and 18%, respectively. Here again, the big hit of the symbol A2 in the first special symbol lottery is different in whether the time saving function is given/not given depending on the probability state, and when the probability state is the normal state (normal mode), the time saving function is given, and the probability state Is a high probability state (rush preparation mode, rush mode), the time saving function is not added.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 222(B), the rush mode plunge probability is 18% when the first short-time big hit (first big hit A1 or A2) occurs (from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode plunge). The rush mode entry probability at the time of occurrence of the second short-time big hit (first big hit A1) is 62%. Here, in the second modification, since there is a possibility of always shifting to the normal mode with a probability of 18%, the rush mode rush probability at the time of occurrence of the third time saving big hit (first big hit A1) at reaching the time saving limit number of times is 82%.

Subsequently, FIG. 223 is a diagram showing a transition of the game state (game mode) of the second modification of the fourth embodiment. Here, differences from the fourth embodiment (FIG. 205) will be described. The modification 2 is characterized in that the first and second big jackpots X to which neither the probability varying function nor the time saving function is given are provided, and when these functions are given, they are effective until the next big hit. Therefore, in the normal mode, even if the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first big hit X occurs with a probability of 18%, and there is a case where the mode transition does not occur. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the mode transition from the rush preparation mode and the rush mode to the normal mode is triggered by the ST number being exhausted, but in the second modification, the normal state is triggered by the occurrence of the first/second big hit X. Switch to mode.

(Effect of Modification 2)
According to the modified example 2 of the fourth embodiment, when the first/second big hit X (no normal time saving) occurs in the rush mode or the rush preparation mode, the mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, the first/second big hit X big hit distribution ratio is uniformly 18% in any game mode. Therefore, even if the rush mode or the rush preparation mode is entered, there is a possibility that the mode always shifts to the normal mode, so that it is possible to give a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the mode is maintained with respect to a change immediately after entering the mode. In this way, by increasing the chances of shifting to the game mode, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

In addition, even if the first big hit A1 that occurs during the rush preparation mode is added and counted, if the first big hit X occurs before the number of time saving limits is reached, the count that has been counted up to now is reset. , The chance of moving to rush mode is far away. In this way, whether or not the time saving function is activated is also important for the big hit in the time saving limit activated state, and since various game patterns are created, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the rush preparation mode.

(Fifth Embodiment)
The gaming machine of the present invention does not activate the time saving function generally favored to the player, so that the game is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated (high probability time saving state, rush preparation mode). It is characterized by providing a state (high probability non-time saving state, rush mode). In the above-described embodiment, when the short-time function (time-saving number) is given in the jackpot of the special symbol lottery, the probability changing function of the same number (ST number) as the time-saving number is given. Then, the trigger for shifting to the high-probability non-time saving state (rush mode) is only the occurrence of the first big hit B (there is a probability change and no time saving) in the first to third embodiments, but in the fourth embodiment. Includes multiple occurrences of the first big hit A (with probable change and time reduction) (reaching time reduction limit) in the high probability time reduction condition. In this way, the interest of the game is enhanced by increasing the chances of transition to the game state advantageous to the player (high-probability non-time saving state). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, with reference to FIGS. 224 to 231, game control and effect control capable of further enhancing the interest of the game with respect to the transition to the high-probability non-time saving state will be described.

[Game board configuration]
First, in the game board of the fifth embodiment, similarly to the game board described above, a normal electric auditors product is provided in the winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, and a low probability non-time saving state (normal mode) and a high probability time saving are provided. In the state (rush preparation mode), the game on the first special symbol side is the center, and in the high-probability non-time saving state (rush mode), the player's driving operation and the player are the center of the game on the second special symbol side. Any configuration may be used as long as it is possible to guide the winning port for aiming. Further, the second start opening and the special winning opening are arranged so as to have the same driving operation direction.

[Hit specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 to 226, the hit specifications of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 224 is a table showing the winning probabilities of the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 225 is a table showing the hit type and distribution rate of the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 226 is a table showing the hit type and distribution rate of the second special symbol of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 224(A) is an example of a winning determination table for the first special symbol lottery. In the first special symbol lottery, when the winning probability is in a low probability state (normal state), a big hit is won with a probability of 5/399. Also, in the high probability state (probability variation state) in which the winning probability is set higher than in the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 7/399. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided even in the first special symbol lottery, and the small hit is won with a probability of 5/399.

FIG. 224(B) is an example of a winning determination table for the second special symbol lottery. In the second special symbol lottery, like the first special symbol lottery, if the winning probability is low probability state (normal state), high probability state (probability change state), the probability of 5/399, 7/399 respectively And win the big hit. Also, with a probability of 390/399, a small win is won.

FIG. 224(C) is an example of a table showing the winning probability of a normal symbol. In the ordinary symbol lottery, in the case of a non-time saving state in which the time saving function is not given, the probability of winning is 1/200 with a probability of winning per ordinary drawing. Also, in the case of the time saving state in which the time saving function is provided, the probability of winning is 1/199 per universal figure. In this embodiment, both probabilities are set so that the player cannot distinguish between the non-time saving state and the time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 225(A) to (C), the first special symbol hit consists of eight kinds of big hits and one kind of small hits, and each big hit is a target to which the time saving function is given according to the gaming state. The number of fluctuations (number of shortening times) is different. It should be noted that all jackpots are provided with a probability changing function of 128 ST times.

An opening pattern A and an opening pattern B are provided as the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 in the big hit of the first special symbol. Six kinds of big hits of the symbols A to E become the open pattern A. For the big hits of the symbols A to E, the number of times of shortening is set for each. As shown in FIG. 225(A), when the game state is a low-probability non-time saving state, the big hit (first big hit A) of the symbol A gives the same 128 times as the ST times. That is, the first big hit A that occurs in the low probability non-time saving state can provide the high probability time saving state with the fluctuation upper limit of 128 times. Further, the big hits of the symbols B to E (first big hits B to E) are given shorter and shorter times than the ST times, 118 times, 64 times, 32 times, and 16 times, respectively. That is, the first big hits B to E that occur in the low-probability non-time saving state can provide the high-probability time-saving state for the number of times saved and the high-probability non-time saving state for the number of times obtained by subtracting the number of times saving from the ST number. Further, the big hit (first big hit F) of the pattern F which is the open pattern B does not have the time saving function (the time saving frequency is 0 times). The first jackpot F is not affected by the game state at the time of occurrence. That is, the first big hit F can provide the high probability non-time saving state for the number of STs regardless of which game state occurs. The probabilities of winning the first jackpots A to F in the first special symbol lottery (distribution ratio) are set to 5%, 20%, 35%, 25%, 10%, and 5%, respectively.

The small hit of the first special symbol is one kind in any gaming state, and becomes a small hit of the symbol G (first small hit G) at a distribution ratio of 100%. Since the small hit is a hit without state transition, the probability change function and the time saving function do not work. The opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 is an opening pattern A.

In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the first small hit G is set to the same opening pattern A as the first big hits A to E, and the universal figure winning probability is set so that the time saving state and the non-time saving upper body cannot be distinguished. This prevents the player from understanding whether or not the game state has transitioned to the winning state.

As shown in FIG. 225(B), when the gaming state is the high-probability time-saving state, the number of time-savings given by the first jackpot A to C is given when the game state is the low-probability non-time-saving state. Different from hourly times. Specifically, the first jackpots A to C give 0, 16, and 32 times, respectively. That is, the first big hit A that occurs in the high-probability time saving state provides the high-probability non-time saving state for the number of ST times. Further, the first big hits B and C that occur in the high-probability time-saving state are shifted to the high-probability non-time-saving state after passing through the high-probability time-saving state for a shorter number of times that the game state occurs in the low-probability non-time-saving state. It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 225(C), when the game state is the high-probability non-time saving state, the number of time reductions given by the first jackpot AE is set to 0 times. That is, each of the first big hits A to F occurring in the high-probability non-time saving state newly provides the high-probability non-time saving state for the number of STs without changing the game state.

As shown in FIGS. 226(A) to (C), the hit of the second special symbol is composed of two kinds of big hits and one kind of small hits. Here, the small hit of the second special symbol is the same symbol and open pattern as the small hit G of the first special symbol. In addition, the probability change function with the number of STs of 128 is given to all the big hits.

The big hit of the second special symbol is provided with a big hit of the symbol A of the open pattern B (second big hit A) and a big hit of the symbol B of the open pattern C (second big hit B). The second jackpots A and B both have a probability variation function of 128 ST times. Then, as shown in FIGS. 226(A) and (B), when the gaming state is the low-probability non-time saving state and the high-probability time saving state, the second jackpot A and B are 128 times the same as the ST number. It is possible to provide a high-probability time-saving state in which a time-saving number is given, that is, a variation upper limit of 128 times. Further, as shown in FIG. 226(C), when the gaming state is the high probability time saving state, the second jackpots A and B do not provide the time saving function. That is, the second big hits A and B that occur in the high-probability non-time saving state newly provide the high-probability non-time saving state for the number of STs without changing the game state. In addition, the probability (distribution rate) of winning the second big hit A in the second special symbol lottery is 40%, and the probability of winning the second big hit B is 60%.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the low-probability non-time saving state and the high-probability time saving state is set to a long time (600 seconds or more). The probability of winning a special symbol lottery is considerably low. Even if a hit occurs, the number of shortening times is the same as the number of ST's, so that the high probability non-shortening state (rush mode), which is most advantageous to the player, is not triggered by this situation.

Here, three types of opening patterns A to C are provided in the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 of the present embodiment. The opening pattern A applied not only to the first big hits A to E but also to the opening form of the first small hit G and the second small hit G is the opening pattern E of the second small hit C of the first embodiment described above ( This is similar to FIG. 146(D)). The opening pattern A has a short opening time and is provided so that a prize ball can be obtained by accidental winning. Specifically, when about 1 to 2 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103, about 15 to 30 prize balls can be won. On the other hand, in the opening pattern B of the first big hit F and the second big hit A, and the opening pattern C of the second big hit B, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 is long, and the player can obtain a sufficient prize ball. Is set as follows. Specifically, the open pattern B is an open mode in which about 500 prize balls can be obtained, and the open pattern C is about 2000 prize balls.

[Transition of production mode]
FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining the effect mode transition in the fifth embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the high-probability non-time saving state (rush mode) is the most advantageous game state for the player, as in the above-described embodiments. Then, as a trigger for shifting to the rush mode, the achievement of a predetermined number of times of variation in the high-probability time saving state (rush preparation mode) (digestion of time saving number) is set. In the rush preparation mode, it is possible to shift the game state without going through the big hit, so each big jackpot that triggers the shift to the rush preparation mode has an effect mode according to the number of STs. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 227(A) and 227(B), the corresponding effect mode transition will be described by taking a hit of the first special symbol that can occur in the low-probability non-time saving state (normal mode) as an example.

FIG. 227(A) is an effect mode setting table for the first hit in the normal mode. In the effect mode setting table, effect modes are set for each hit (FIG. 225(A)) in accordance with the number of changes in the game state after the hit occurs.

Specifically, the first big hits B to E that occur in the normal mode can shift from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode when the number of times saved is shortened. Therefore, in the game state (rush preparation mode) after these big hit games, the precursor effect mode that indicates the possibility of the rush mode transition is set. The precursor effect mode is executed by a change while the time saving function is operating, so the period differs for each jackpot type. It should be noted that the maximum number of times that the aura effect mode is applied is 64 times. Further, in the omen effect mode, the time saving release effect is executed at the timing at which the time saving number (16, 32, 64) given by any of the big hits is reached.

Here, when the time saving function continues to operate even when the precursor effect mode is finished as in the case of the first jackpot B, the revenge effect mode is set until the number of time saving is exhausted. The revenge effect mode is an effect mode that is set for the game in the rush preparation mode after the number of fluctuations of 65 times and suggests that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability non-time saving state (normal mode).

In the first jackpot B, the remaining 10 ST times are in the high probability non-time saving state. Therefore, in the high-probability non-time saving state (rush mode) for the remaining 10 fluctuations, the chance production mode suggests that the rush mode can be continued even if any of the big hits can be won during this period. Is set. Further, at this time, the player aims to hit the game ball to the second starting opening 2012 by "right hitting". In the second special symbol lottery, you can win the small hit with a high probability (390/399) even if you don't win the big hit, so you can get the prize ball by the second small hit G during this period (ST10 times) It may be suggested in the chance production mode that the period has been given.

In each of the first big hits C to E, the number of time saving is set to 64 times or less, so that only the indication effect mode is set. Then, in the case of the time reduction end without the occurrence of a new big hit in the omen effect mode, the battle reach victory effect is executed in the first variation of the subsequent rush mode. Details of the battle reach victory effect will be described later.

Since the first big hit A is the same number of times as the number of STs (128 times), the rush preparation mode is switched to the normal mode upon completion of the number of times saved. Therefore, in the rush preparation mode triggered by the first big hit A, there is no transition to the rush mode triggered by the reduction in the number of times saved, but there is a gaze sign presentation mode (1 to 64 fluctuations) that expects that possibility. Is set. Here, let us say that the gust omen effect mode is the same effect mode as the omen effect mode. Then, after the end of the warning sign effect mode, the revenge effect mode (up to 65 times to 128 times) is set.

The first small hit G does not trigger the game state transition, but as described above, the opening patterns of the first big hits A to E and the special winning opening 2103 are the same, and the time saving function is added in the present embodiment (general drawing winning). Since it is difficult for the player to grasp the change in probability), it is difficult for the player to judge whether the player has won the small hit or the big hit. Therefore, in the normal mode after the occurrence of the first small hit G, the bad sign warning effect mode is set. As a result, the player can no longer distinguish between the big hit and the small hit from the effect mode, and can expect the game after the small hit, which enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the first big hit F directly shifts to the rush mode without the operation of the time saving function, so that the above-mentioned precursor effect mode, revenge effect mode and chance effect mode are not set.

Here, the effect mode setting table for the first hit in the normal mode has been described, but the same applies to the effect mode for the first hit in the rush preparation mode. As described above with reference to FIG. 225(B), the first big hit in the rush preparation mode has a maximum of 32 times of saving time, so only the indication effect mode is set. In addition, the first small hit G is set to a gallant aura effect mode that changes 32 times. Further, since any big hit that occurs in the rush mode also becomes the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), these effect modes are not set.

FIG. 227(B) shows that in the normal mode, (B1) the first big hit B occurs, (B2) the first big hit A occurs, and (B3) the first big hit D occurs in the rush mode after the occurrence. It is the figure which explains the production mode transition example when big hit B occurs.

As shown in FIG. 227(B1), the effect mode when the first big hit B occurs in the low-probability non-time saving state (normal mode) is the high-probability time-saving state (rush preparation mode) in the omen effect mode (1 to 64). From the time change) to the revenge effect mode (change from 65 to 118 times), and the chance effect mode (change from 119 to 128 times) in the high-probability non-time saving state (rush mode), which is shifted by the time saving. In addition, as shown in FIG. 227 (B2), the production mode when the first big hit A occurs in the low-probability non-time saving state (normal mode) is the high-probability time-shortening state (rush preparation mode). Transition from 1 to 64 times) to revenge effect mode (65 to 128 times).

In this way, even in the first big hit A that does not include the opportunity to switch to the rush mode, by executing the harbinger omen effect mode and the revenge effect mode, the player can play the first big hit B that includes the opportunity to move to the rush mode. Without making a distinction, it is possible to have the expectation of the rush mode transition immediately before the ST number of times is exhausted (10 remaining times). Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 227(B3), the effect mode when the first big hit D occurs in the low-probability non-time saving state (normal mode) is the high-probability time-saving state (rush preparation mode) in the omen effect mode (1 to 32). Run twice). When the first big hit B occurs in the precursor production mode at the 20th variation time, the first big hit B in the rush preparation mode gives the ST count 128 times and the shortening time 16 times. Fluctuations begin, and the precursor effect mode is extended accordingly. Although the transition timing from rush preparation mode entry to rush mode is delayed due to the first jackpot D, the number of fluctuations in the rush mode after the transition occurs due to the occurrence of the first jackpot B, which has a shorter time saving number than the ST number. Will increase from 96 times to 112 times. Therefore, the player can expect a long rush mode period that can be acquired even if a big hit occurs during the rush preparation mode and the rush preparation mode is extended, so that the interest of the game is not deteriorated. It is possible to set a value that is smaller than the number of times of saving and shortening corresponding to the big hit that has triggered the current precursor effect mode, as the number of times of saving and shortening corresponding to a new big hit. Further, if a big hit occurs during the predictive effect mode, the predictive effect mode period (the shortened number of times (a predetermined number of times) finally given before entering the rush mode may change, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. ..

[Transition of game state]
FIG. 228 is a diagram showing a transition of the game state (game mode) of the fifth embodiment. Here, a description will be given together with the transition of the effect mode described above.

In the low probability non-time saving state (normal mode), which is the game state at the start of the game, the game of the first special symbol is the main. Here, if the first special symbol lottery is won, the game state shifts according to the winning type. When the winning result is any one of the first big hits A to E, the game state shifts from the low-probability non-time saving state (normal mode) to the high-probability time saving state (rush preparation mode). When the winning result is the first big hit F, the gaming state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state (normal mode) to the high probability non-time saving state (rush mode). In addition, when the winning result is the first small hit G, the gallant aura effect mode is set up to a variation of 64 times.

In the rush preparation mode, the game of the first special symbol is the same as in the normal mode. The rush preparation mode triggered by the first big hit A returns to the normal mode when the number of shortened times (the number of STs) 128 is exhausted in the high probability shortened state in the gaze warning sign production mode and the revenge production mode. In addition, the rush preparation mode triggered by the first big hit B shifts to the rush mode when 118 times are saved in the high probability time saving state in the omen effect mode and the revenge effect mode. The rush mode triggered by the end of the time saving of the first big hit B returns to the normal mode when the remaining 10 ST times are exhausted in the high probability non-time saving state in the chance effect mode. Further, the rush preparation mode triggered by the first big hits C to E shifts to the rush mode when the number of time saving is exhausted in the high probability time saving state in the predictive presentation mode. In the rush mode triggered by the end of the first jackpots C to E, the battle reach victory effect is executed in the first fluctuation immediately after the entry, and when the remaining ST number is exhausted, the mode returns to the normal mode.

When the first big hit A or F is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode, after the big hit game, the rush mode is entered. When the first big hit B to E are won, after the big hit game, the high probability time saving state in the omen effect mode is entered, and when the number of time saving is exhausted, the mode shifts to the rush mode. Further, when the first small hit G is won, after the small hit game, the gallant sign presentation mode of changing 32 times is executed.

In the rush mode, the game of the second special symbol is mainly. In the rush mode, when the number of STs at the time of entry is exhausted, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In the second special symbol lottery in the rush mode (first special symbol lottery), even if you win any jackpot, it does not shift to another game mode. In either jackpot, the rush mode period is extended by adding the number of fluctuations executed in the rush mode.

In the rush mode, the second special symbol lottery is provided so that the second small hit G occurs frequently. It is possible for the player to continuously hit the game ball aiming at the second starting opening, thereby promoting accidental winning based on the second small hit G, and the number of prize balls obtainable is in the rush mode. It occupies the majority of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in (total number of acquired balls). In the present embodiment, when the number of ST small hits (128 times) of the second small hit G (maximum 30 balls) occurs during the rush mode, the prize ball by the second big hit B (about 2000) is the largest number of prize balls by the big hit. Since more prize balls (up to 3840 balls) can be expected, a series of games in the rush mode is more advantageous to the player than one big hit game. Also, since the number of prize balls in the first big hit is about 500, the rush mode is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the rush preparation mode mainly for the game of the first special symbol.

[Production mode setting process]
FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode setting process in the fifth embodiment. The effect mode setting process is one of the processes executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010. The effect mode may be set from the jackpot type and the game mode by using the effect mode setting table as shown in FIG. 227(A) described above, but here, an example of the processing by the flow control will be described.

The peripheral control MPU 414a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a big hit start command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3701). The big hit start command is a command which is set in the big hit game process when the big hit game is started and transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010.

When the peripheral control MPU 414a receives the big hit start command (YES in step S3701), the peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the big hit this time is a big hit to which the time saving function is added (step S3702). Then, in the case of a big hit (for example, the first big hit F) to which the time saving function is not added (NO in step S3702), this processing is ended.

On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the number of time reductions is less than the number of STs (step S3703) when it is a big hit to which the time reduction function is added (YES in step S3702). Then, if the number of time reductions is less than the number of STs (YES in step S3703), it is determined whether the number of time reductions is a predetermined number or less (step S3704). Here, the predetermined number differs depending on the game mode. It is "64" in the normal mode and "32" in the rush preparation mode.

If the number of times saved is less than or equal to the predetermined number (YES in step S3704), peripheral control MPU 414a sets the omen effect mode until the number of times saved is reduced (step S3705), and ends this processing. If the number of time saving is not less than or equal to the predetermined number (NO in step S3704), the predictive effect mode is up to the predetermined number, the revenge effect mode is over the predetermined number up to the time saving number, and the number ST is after the end of the time saving number is the chance effect mode. The setting is made (step S3706), and this processing ends.

When the number of time saving is not less than the number of STs, that is, when the number of saving time is the number of STs or more (NO in step S3703), the peripheral control MPU 414a exceeds the predetermined number to the predetermined sign operation mode, and the ST exceeds the predetermined number. The revenge effect mode is set up to the number of times (step S3707), and this processing ends.

If the big hit start command has not been received (NO at step S3701), peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether a small hit start command has been received (step S3708). If the small hit start command has not been received (NO in step S3708), this process ends.

When peripheral control MPU 414a receives the small hit start command (YES in step S3708), peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S3709). Since the aura effect mode is an effect mode executed in a time saving state, if the time saving function is not in operation (NO in step S3709), this process ends. On the other hand, if the time saving function is operating (YES in step S3709), the gallant aura effect mode is set up to a predetermined number (step S3710), and the present process is ended.

It should be noted that the effect mode switching timing may be determined based on a counter value that counts the number of STs.

[Production execution processing]
FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect execution process in the fifth embodiment. The effect execution process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU 414a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not a state transition instruction command for releasing the time saving function has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S3801). The state transition instruction command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 when the state of the probability flag or the time saving flag is changed. The state transition instruction command is transmitted when the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is set to the on state due to a big hit, or when the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is set to the off state due to the ST number or the time saving number being exhausted.

When the peripheral control MPU 414a receives the state transition instruction command for canceling the time saving function (YES in step S3801), the peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations in the time saving state has reached the number of time saving (step S3802). When the number of times of fluctuations in the time saving state has reached the number of times of saving time (YES in step S3802), it is determined whether or not the present amenity presentation mode is in effect (step S3803). If the number of fluctuations in the time saving state has not reached the number of times saving (NO in step S3802) or if the number of times of shortening has reached the number of times saving and is not in the omen presentation mode (NO in step S3803), this processing is performed. finish.

If the peripheral control MPU 414a is in the precursor effect mode (YES in step S3803), the peripheral reach MPU 414a sets the battle reach flag (step S3804) and ends the present process. Therefore, the battle reach flag is set when the number of saved times (16, 32, 64) given in the high-probability time-saving state in which the present indication effect mode is set is exhausted.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 414a has not received the state shift instruction command for canceling the time saving function from the main control board 4100 (NO in step S3801), it determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received (step S3801). S3805). Then, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (NO in step S3805), this processing ends.

When peripheral control MPU 414a receives the variation pattern command (YES in step S3805), peripheral control MPU 414a determines whether the battle reach flag is set (step S3806). Then, when the battle reach flag is set (YES in step S3806), the change immediately after the number of shortened times given without hitting in the precursor effect mode is exhausted, so the battle reach is affected by the change. The winning effect is executed (step S3807), and this processing ends. If the battle reach flag is not set (NO in step S3806), the normal effect selected according to the effect mode is executed (step S3808), and the present process ends.

In the present embodiment, since the switching process of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is performed at the time of starting the fluctuation, when the time saving end is performed in the predictive effect mode, the time saving flag is turned on when the last time fluctuation in the predictive effect mode is started. To the off state (the time saving function is canceled). Therefore, at the start of the last variation in the omen effect mode, the peripheral control board 4010 receives the state transition instruction command indicating that the high-probability time saving state has transitioned to the high-probability non-time saving state. Therefore, if the player shifts to the high-probability non-time saving state after a change in the number of short-time reductions that have been given without hitting during the precursor effect mode, the battle reach is reached by the first change in the high-probability non-time saving state after the transition. The player is informed that the player has entered the rush mode (high-probability non-time saving state), which is advantageous for the player by performing the winning effect.

[Screen transition example]
Subsequently, FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of the effect transition in the fifth embodiment. 231(A) and (B) are example production transitions in the case of transitioning from the high-probability time-saving state of the aura production mode to the high-probability non-time-saving state after the number of times of time reduction has been exhausted. 231(A), (C), and (D) are examples of production transitions in the case of transitioning from the high-probability time-saving state consisting of the aura production mode and the revenge production mode to the high-probability non-time-saving state after the number of time reductions has been exhausted. ..

FIG. 231(A) is an example of a screen display in the omen effect mode. Here, the effect element in the high-probability time saving state (rush preparation mode) is night (moon and star). In addition, the production element of the high probability non-time saving state (rush mode) is assumed to be daytime (sun). In the sign production mode, a transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode is suggested, so the screen display at this time shows the sun behind and behind the clouds in a part of the night sky.

In addition, the screen display displays the remaining variation number when the remaining variation number when the precursor effect mode is started is set to "64" and the execution number in the mode is subtracted and displayed. Here, "50" is displayed. By performing such a display of the number of remaining fluctuations, the player who sees the display of "remaining 64 times" at the start of the predictive effect mode can play a game state advantageous to the player after digesting 64 times (high probability non-time saving state, rush time). It is possible to entertain the game with a sense of expectation in the future game, such as whether it will shift to the mode) or whether something good will happen during the 64 changes. Then, in the case of the precursor effect mode triggered by the first big hit D in which the number of fluctuations (the number of times of shortening) for performing the precursor effect mode is set to 32 times and the first big hit E set in 16 times, the number of times is 64 times. The rush mode is entered (battle reach victory effect is executed) in the middle of the variation digestion (“49 times remaining” and “33 times remaining”, respectively). In this way, since the rush mode is entered before the remaining number of fluctuations displayed on the screen becomes 0, the player's joy is great. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced. As described above, since the same screen display is performed in the omen effect mode and the geek omen effect mode, the remaining number of fluctuations is initially set to “64” in the gaze omen effect mode.

FIG. 231(B) is a screen display example of a battle reach victory effect. Here, the moon, which is the production element of the rush preparation mode, and the sun, which is the production element of the rush mode, enter a battle state, and the screen display in which the sun wins is displayed. At this time, the player is instructed to "right hit".

FIG. 231(C) is a screen display example of the revenge effect mode. Here, it was not possible to shift to the rush mode during the precursor effect mode, but it is suggested that it is more likely to shift to the rush mode than the normal mode, so that the player does not give up aiming for the rush mode, The screen display is such that the display occupancy range of the sun and clouds that was displayed in the omen effect mode is enlarged.

FIG. 231(D) is an example of a screen display in the chance effect mode. The chance effect mode is an effect mode during the rush mode. However, if there is no big hit during this period, the mode will be switched to the normal mode for a short period (10 fluctuations), so the entire screen will show the sun, but the sun will sway and be unstable. Is a screen display on which a message "" is displayed. If the big hit does not occur during this time and the rush mode ends, the sun is temporarily stopped and the screen display disappears with the message "sorry".

(Effects of the fifth embodiment)
According to the fifth embodiment, the trigger for shifting to a specific game state (high-probability non-time saving state, rush mode) which is advantageous to the player for execution (digestion) of a predetermined number of changes in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode). Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of shifting to the rush mode in addition to the occurrence of a specific big hit (first big hit F). Also, because of the playability that allows you to enter the rush mode after a certain number of fluctuations, you can make the player feel that you can compete not only with the strength of pulling (luck) to win the big hit, but also with standing (skill). Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

Here, in the rush preparation mode, the rush preparation mode is shifted to the rush mode (specific mode) which is more advantageous to the player, upon the end of the predetermined number of fluctuations set to be smaller than the ST number. The predetermined number of fluctuations differs depending on the type of the big hit (first big hit B to E) that triggered the rush preparation mode. If a big hit occurs in the rush preparation mode that has not reached the predetermined number of fluctuations, it is reset to the predetermined number of fluctuations set according to the big hit, so depending on the kind and number of big hits generated in the rush preparation mode. The number of fluctuations required from entering the rush preparation mode to shifting to the rush mode changes. In this way, since the variation end timing of the predetermined variation number that triggers the transition to the rush mode is diversified, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Also, due to the big hit that occurred in the rush preparation mode that has not reached the predetermined number of fluctuations, the number of time saving (the new predetermined number of fluctuations) set according to the big hit is added to the number of time saving that was already consumed. If the variable digestion is advanced, the rush preparation mode period may become longer. However, if the new predetermined number of fluctuations is smaller than the previous predetermined number of fluctuations, the rush mode period that can be acquired will be longer, so the player should expect to increase the rush mode period during the big hit during the rush preparation mode. Since it is possible, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the smaller the predetermined number of fluctuations with respect to the number of STs given to the rush preparation mode, the longer the rush mode period. That is, the smaller the predetermined number of fluctuations, the more the function of promoting the generation of the rush mode, and the larger the number of fluctuations, the more the function of suppressing the generation of the rush mode. In this way, by adjusting the variable number of times of variation, it is possible to create opposing game situations of promoting and suppressing the occurrence of the rush mode, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the game mode before and after the predetermined number of fluctuations (rush preparation mode and rush mode), the rush mode entry ratio changes when the big hit of the same special symbol occurs. Specifically, the first big hit in the rush preparation mode becomes the big hit after game rush mode at a rate of 10%, but the first big hit in the rush mode becomes a rush mode at a rate of 100%. Also, the second jackpot in the rush preparation mode has a 0% rate after the big hit game rush mode, but the second jackpot in the rush mode becomes a rush mode at a rate of 100%. In this way, even in the same special symbol lottery with the predetermined number of fluctuations as a boundary, the rush mode entry ratio is different, so that the influence of the timing of digestion of fluctuations such as pending storage on the game becomes large. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the rush preparation mode, the predictive effect mode period (specific effect mode period) is provided in a change period of a predetermined number of changes. Since the fluctuation period of the predetermined fluctuation number becomes a precursor (announcement) of the rush mode that occurs later, it is possible to execute the announcement effect that was conventionally possible only within the range of the upper limit number of holding for a long time. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained for a long time. Further, during the precursor effect mode period, if the predetermined number of fluctuations is exhausted, the rush mode is entered, so that it is easy to give a gap even if a big hit does not occur, and the game is not boring. In addition, the first big hit A and the first small hit G are also provided with a bad sign precursor effect mode period. Since the player can not distinguish between the omen production mode and the gaze omen production mode, it is possible to enjoy playing during the omen production mode period with the excitement of whether or not the mode development from the big hit this time to the rush mode will occur. it can.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1180 Function display unit 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2100 Attacker device 2101 First starting opening 2101a Regular winning opening 2101b Special winning opening 2102 Second starting opening 2111 Moving piece (normal electric accessory)
2301 Universal drawing gate 4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board (effect (display) control means, disadvantage game state suggesting means, effect changing means, display means, effect switching means, effect executing means, movable accessory control means, origin determining means, (Operation prohibiting means, display giving number setting means, remaining number display means, adjusting means, effect determination means, pseudo effect means, transition suggestion effect means)
4100 main control board (game control means, first lottery game execution means, second lottery game execution means, specific game execution means, interlocking control means, result replacement means, other detection means, disadvantageous game state generation means, result change means, Temporary stopping means, resuming means, forced ending means, resetting means, specific result derivation judging means, game state setting means, advantageous game state shifting means, award number setting means, execution number counting means, game state shifting means, number counting means , Transition inhibiting means, game state transition prohibiting means, predetermined number of times determining means, predetermined number of times changing means)

Claims (1)

First lottery means for performing lottery based on entering the first start opening,
Second lottery means for performing lottery based on entering the second start opening,
Movable lottery execution means for executing a normal lottery based on the detection of the game medium and operating the movable member when the lottery result is a predetermined result,
Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of symbols based on the lottery of the first lottery means and the second lottery means,
As a game for giving a profit to a player, a first advantageous game that is performed at different probabilities according to a game state based on the lottery of the first lottery means or the second lottery means, and at least the second lottery means. Advantageous game executing means capable of executing a second advantageous game which is performed at a certain probability regardless of the game state based on a lottery and is provided with a profit less than the first advantageous game,
In the normal game state, the first preferred game is executed by a particular drawing result derived by the first selecting means is different from a gaming state in response to execution of the first preferred game and the normal game state Specific game state transition means for shifting to a specific game state,
In the normal game state, the first lottery means derives a special lottery result to execute the first advantageous game, and when the first advantageous game is executed, the game state differs from the normal game state. Together with special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state different from the specific game state,
While the probability that the second advantageous game is executed is set to be a constant probability, the variable display that can be executed based on the lottery by the second lottery means in the normal game state is displayed for a long time, and thereby the second Lottery frequency suppressing means for suppressing the execution frequency of the advantageous game,
While the probability that the second advantageous game is executed is a constant probability, the variable display that can be executed based on the lottery of the second lottery means in the specific game state is short and shorter than the long time. A lottery frequency improving means for increasing the execution frequency of the second advantageous game by
The specific game state has a higher lottery probability that the first advantageous game will be executed than the normal game state, and the first advantage executed based on the lottery of the second lottery means. Rather than the profit given in the game, the profit given in the second advantageous game in which the variation display based on the lottery by the second lottery means is executed by the lottery frequency improving means during the short time period. It is the most advantageous lottery state for the player who is supposed to be more,
In the normal game state, based on the lottery of the first lottery means, even if a long-time variable display is performed based on the lottery of the second lottery means in order to suppress the frequency of execution of the second advantageous game. When the specific lottery result in which the first advantageous game is executed in the variable display is derived , even if the long-term variable display based on the lottery of the second lottery means is changing, the specific lottery result At the timing when is derived, the variable display for a long time based on the lottery of the second lottery means is stopped ,
Unlike the specific game state, the special game state is executed based on the lottery of the second lottery means rather than the profit given in the first advantageous game executed based on the lottery of the second lottery means. Although the profit provided in the second advantageous game is not set to be larger, the lottery probability that the first advantageous game is executed is higher than that in the normal game state, and A game machine characterized in that the frequency of operating the movable member by the movable lottery execution means is increased so as to increase the frequency of performing a lottery than in the normal game state and the specific game state .